Prove2Me
Navigate
DiscoverFormalpediaBlogsUsersMomentumMy Missions+
Prove2Me
⌕
Log in

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

Probability

453 missions · 264 completed

Missions

Open189Completed264All453
Dynamic ProgrammingOperations ResearchStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

On the Optimal Dividend Problem for a Spectrally Negative Lévy Process I: Optimality of the Barrier Strategy at c* in the Classical Dividend ProblemResearch Paper

Motivation

An insurance company's surplus grows with premiums and falls with claims. In the Cramér–Lundberg model with a positive safety loading, the surplus drifts to +∞+\infty+∞ with probability one. De Finetti (1957) objected that a company does not accumulate capital indefinitely: surplus above some level is paid out to shareholders. He proposed choosing the payout policy to maximize the expected discounted dividends paid before ruin. This is the optimal dividend problem. It is one of the basic stochastic control problems of actuarial mathematics and corporate finance, and it serves as a test case for singular control of processes with jumps.

The classical answer is a barrier strategy: pay out whatever lifts the surplus above a level aaa and nothing else. Jeanblanc and Shiryaev (1995) proved this optimal when the surplus is a Brownian motion with drift, and Gerber and Shiu studied the same Brownian setting. Azcue and Muler (2005) showed that it can fail in the Cramér–Lundberg model, where the optimal policy may be a band strategy. Avram, Palmowski and Pistorius (Ann. Appl. Probab. 17 (2007) 156–180) treated a general spectrally negative Lévy process, a process with stationary independent increments and only downward jumps. They found the value of every barrier strategy in closed form through the scale function of the process and identified the best barrier level c∗c^*c∗. They also gave a verification condition under which the barrier at c∗c^*c∗ is optimal among all strategies. Loeffen (2008) later showed that the condition holds whenever the Lévy measure has a completely monotone density.

Setting

Let X=(Xt)t≥0X=(X_t)_{t\ge0}X=(Xt​)t≥0​ be a spectrally negative Lévy process on a filtered probability space (Ω,F,F,P)(\Omega,\mathcal F,\mathbb F,P)(Ω,F,F,P) with X0=0X_0=0X0​=0 and Lévy triplet (c,σ,ν)(c,\sigma,\nu)(c,σ,ν). Its Laplace exponent is ψ(θ)=log⁡E[eθX1]\psi(\theta)=\log\mathbf E[e^{\theta X_1}]ψ(θ)=logE[eθX1​], finite for θ≥0\theta\ge0θ≥0:

ψ(θ)=cθ+σ22θ2+∫(−∞,0)(eθy−1−θy1{∣y∣<1})ν(dy).\psi(\theta)=c\theta+\tfrac{\sigma^2}{2}\theta^2+\int_{(-\infty,0)}\bigl(e^{\theta y}-1-\theta y\mathbf 1_{\{|y|<1\}}\bigr)\nu(dy).ψ(θ)=cθ+2σ2​θ2+∫(−∞,0)​(eθy−1−θy1{∣y∣<1}​)ν(dy).

Increments after time sss are independent of Fs\mathcal F_sFs​. Initial capital xxx is added to XXX. The standing assumptions are the following: XXX does not have monotone paths, E[X1]>−∞\mathbf E[X_1]>-\inftyE[X1​]>−∞, and either σ>0\sigma>0σ>0, ∫(−1,0)∣y∣ ν(dy)=∞\int_{(-1,0)}|y|\,\nu(dy)=\infty∫(−1,0)​∣y∣ν(dy)=∞, or ν\nuν has a density.

A dividend strategy is a nondecreasing, left-continuous, adapted process LLL with L0=0L_0=0L0​=0. The risk process is Ut=x+Xt−LtU_t=x+X_t-L_tUt​=x+Xt​−Lt​ and the ruin time is σL=inf⁡{t≥0:Ut<0}\sigma^L=\inf\{t\ge0:U_t<0\}σL=inf{t≥0:Ut​<0}. The strategy is admissible (L∈ΠL\in\PiL∈Π) if no lump sum exceeds the current reserves. Its value is

vL(x)=E[∫0σLe−qt dLt],v∗(x)=sup⁡L∈ΠvL(x),v_L(x)=\mathbf E\Bigl[\int_0^{\sigma^L}e^{-qt}\,dL_t\Bigr],\qquad v_*(x)=\sup_{L\in\Pi}v_L(x),vL​(x)=E[∫0σL​e−qtdLt​],v∗​(x)=L∈Πsup​vL​(x),

with discount rate q>0q>0q>0. For C∈[0,∞]C\in[0,\infty]C∈[0,∞], Π≤C\Pi_{\le C}Π≤C​ consists of the admissible strategies that keep Ut≤CU_t\le CUt​≤C for t>0t>0t>0.

The qqq-scale function W=W(q)W=W^{(q)}W=W(q) is the unique continuous nondecreasing function on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞) with ∫0∞e−θyW(y) dy=1/(ψ(θ)−q)\int_0^\infty e^{-\theta y}W(y)\,dy=1/(\psi(\theta)-q)∫0∞​e−θyW(y)dy=1/(ψ(θ)−q) for large θ\thetaθ. It is extended by W=0W=0W=0 on (−∞,0)(-\infty,0)(−∞,0). The barrier strategy πa\pi_aπa​ reflects x+Xx+Xx+X at the level aaa, paying (x−a)+(x-a)^+(x−a)+ at time 000. The paper computes its value

va(x)=W(x)W′(a) (0≤x≤a),va(x)=x−a+W(a)W′(a) (x>a),v_a(x)=\frac{W(x)}{W'(a)}\ (0\le x\le a),\qquad v_a(x)=x-a+\frac{W(a)}{W'(a)}\ (x>a),va​(x)=W′(a)W(x)​ (0≤x≤a),va​(x)=x−a+W′(a)W(a)​ (x>a),

and the optimal barrier level is c∗=inf⁡{a>0:W′(a)≤W′(x) ∀x>0}c^*=\inf\{a>0: W'(a)\le W'(x)\ \forall x>0\}c∗=inf{a>0:W′(a)≤W′(x) ∀x>0}, read as 000 when this set is empty and W′(0+)≤W′(x)W'(0+)\le W'(x)W′(0+)≤W′(x) for all x>0x>0x>0. The generator is

Γf(x)=σ22f′′(x)+cf′(x)+∫(−∞,0)[f(x+y)−f(x)−f′(x)y1{∣y∣<1}] ν(dy).\Gamma f(x)=\tfrac{\sigma^2}{2}f''(x)+cf'(x)+\int_{(-\infty,0)}[f(x+y)-f(x)-f'(x)y\mathbf 1_{\{|y|<1\}}]\,\nu(dy).Γf(x)=2σ2​f′′(x)+cf′(x)+∫(−∞,0)​[f(x+y)−f(x)−f′(x)y1{∣y∣<1}​]ν(dy).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2 (p. 14)

Assume σ>0\sigma>0σ>0, or XXX has bounded variation, or vc∗∈C2(0,∞)v_{c^*}\in C^2(0,\infty)vc∗​∈C2(0,∞). Then c∗<∞c^*<\inftyc∗<∞ and:

(i)πc∗∈Π≤c∗,vπc∗(x)=vc∗(x)=sup⁡π∈Π≤c∗vπ(x)(x≥0);\text{(i)}\quad \pi_{c^*}\in\Pi_{\le c^*},\qquad v_{\pi_{c^*}}(x)=v_{c^*}(x)=\sup_{\pi\in\Pi_{\le c^*}}v_\pi(x)\quad(x\ge0);(i)πc∗​∈Π≤c∗​,vπc∗​​(x)=vc∗​(x)=π∈Π≤c∗​sup​vπ​(x)(x≥0); (ii)(Γvc∗−qvc∗)(x)≤0  ∀x>c∗ ⟹ v∗(x)=vc∗(x) (x≥0),  π∗=πc∗.\text{(ii)}\quad (\Gamma v_{c^*}-qv_{c^*})(x)\le0\ \ \forall x>c^*\ \Longrightarrow\ v_*(x)=v_{c^*}(x)\ (x\ge0),\ \ \pi_*=\pi_{c^*}.(ii)(Γvc∗​−qvc∗​)(x)≤0  ∀x>c∗ ⟹ v∗​(x)=vc∗​(x) (x≥0),  π∗​=πc∗​.

The goal fixes no constants: the barrier level and the value function are both given by the scale function of the given process.

Milestones

  • Proposition 1 (p. 7): vπa(x)=W(x)/W′(a)v_{\pi_a}(x)=W(x)/W'(a)vπa​​(x)=W(x)/W′(a) for a>0a>0a>0, x∈[0,a]x\in[0,a]x∈[0,a].
  • Lemma 2(i) (p. 15): c∗<∞c^*<\inftyc∗<∞.
  • Proposition 3(i) (p. 15): va(x)≤vc∗(x)v_a(x)\le v_{c^*}(x)va​(x)≤vc∗​(x) for x∈[0,c∗]x\in[0,c^*]x∈[0,c∗], a≥0a\ge0a≥0.
  • Lemma 3(i) (p. 16): vc∗′(x)≥1v_{c^*}'(x)\ge1vc∗′​(x)≥1 for x>0x>0x>0.
  • Proposition 4(i) (p. 18): a C2C^2C2 (unbounded variation) or C1C^1C1 (bounded variation) solution www of max⁡{Γw−qw,1−w′}=0\max\{\Gamma w-qw,1-w'\}=0max{Γw−qw,1−w′}=0 on (0,C)(0,C)(0,C) dominates sup⁡Π≤Cvπ\sup_{\Pi_{\le C}}v_\pisupΠ≤C​​vπ​.
  • Lemma 4 (p. 20): (Γvc∗−qvc∗)(x)=0(\Gamma v_{c^*}-qv_{c^*})(x)=0(Γvc∗​−qvc∗​)(x)=0 on (0,c∗)(0,c^*)(0,c∗) when c∗>0c^*>0c∗>0.

Significance

The theorem gives an explicit solution to a singular control problem for a general Lévy model. The candidate value function and barrier level are expressed through one special function, W(q)W^{(q)}W(q), and optimality over all strategies reduces to one inequality on (c∗,∞)(c^*,\infty)(c∗,∞). It is the basis of the later literature on scale-function methods in dividend problems (Loeffen 2008, Kyprianou–Rivero–Song 2010, and the refracted and Parisian variants). Part (i) holds with no condition on the Lévy measure. Part (ii) shows exactly where barrier optimality can fail.

The paper's proofs use fluctuation identities (exit problems, excursion theory) and Itô's formula for semimartingales with jumps. None of these is in Mathlib. As far as is known, none of these results has been machine-checked. A formalization would produce a Lévy-process and scale-function layer, a formal model of singular control with jumps and lump-sum payments, and a checked verification argument. Each of these can be reused beyond this paper.

Difficulty

The analytic part is elementary once the value formula (5.1) is available: the choice of c∗c^*c∗, Proposition 3(i) and Lemma 3(i) follow from the shape of W′W'W′. The difficulty lies in the two probabilistic steps. Proposition 1 identifies the value of a reflected process through exit identities for XXX. Those identities rest on excursion theory, or on the martingale property of e−qtW(Xt)e^{-qt}W(X_t)e−qtW(Xt​) up to exit. The verification step, Proposition 4(i), needs Itô's formula for w(Ut)w(U_t)w(Ut​). Here UUU is a jump process controlled by a left-continuous finite-variation process that may itself jump. The change-of-variables formula must also run under only C1C^1C1 regularity when XXX has bounded variation. Just proving that Γw−qw≤0\Gamma w-qw\le0Γw−qw≤0 and w′≥1w'\ge1w′≥1 imply a supermartingale inequality does not settle the question: the lump-sum payments and the jumps of XXX enter the Itô expansion separately and must each be bounded.

Formalization scope

Time is [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞) (ℝ≥0). XXX is a structure carrying the triplet (c,σ,ν)(c,\sigma,\nu)(c,σ,ν) and pathwise càdlàg paths with only downward jumps. It also carries independence of increments from the filtration and stationarity. Its law is fixed by the Laplace transform E[eθXt]=etψ(θ)\mathbf E[e^{\theta X_t}]=e^{t\psi(\theta)}E[eθXt​]=etψ(θ) for θ≥0\theta\ge0θ≥0. The standing assumptions of §2 and (3.3) are bundled as one predicate. The scale function is a hypothesis on a function argument WWW (it is unique). W′(0+)W'(0+)W′(0+) is an extended real, since it is +∞+\infty+∞ for unbounded variation without a Gaussian part.

Values of strategies and value functions lie in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞]. The dividend integral is a Lebesgue–Stieltjes integral over [0,σL)∪{0}[0,\sigma^L)\cup\{0\}[0,σL)∪{0}: it counts the lump sum at time 000 and excludes a payment at the ruin instant.

Several conventions are fixed, and each is disclosed in the item it affects:

  • Admissibility. The paper requires Lt+−Lt<UtL_{t+}-L_t<U_tLt+​−Lt​<Ut​. The formalization uses ≤\le≤, because the paper's own strategy of paying out everything at once needs it.
  • Barrier level (5.2). Printed over a>0a>0a>0 and "all xxx", the defining set is empty for Brownian motion with nonpositive drift. The printed set (with x>0x>0x>0) is kept whenever it is nonempty; when it is empty and W′(0+)≤W′(x)W'(0+)\le W'(x)W′(0+)≤W′(x) for all x>0x>0x>0 — the second alternative in the proof of Lemma 2(i) — c∗=0c^*=0c∗=0, and otherwise c∗=∞c^*=\inftyc∗=∞.
  • Printed slips. The integral ∫−10x ν(dx)\int_{-1}^0 x\,\nu(dx)∫−10​xν(dx) in (3.3) is read as ∫∣x∣ ν(dx)\int|x|\,\nu(dx)∫∣x∣ν(dx). In (3.4), e−θxe^{-\theta x}e−θx is read as e−θye^{-\theta y}e−θy, and in Theorem 2(i), πc∗\pi^*_cπc∗​ is read as πc∗\pi_{c^*}πc∗​.
  • Proposition 4(i) is stated for initial capital x≤Cx\le Cx≤C. Beyond CCC, www is unconstrained and the printed claim fails.
  • Lemma 4 carries the smoothness proviso of Theorem 2 on (0,c∗)(0,c^*)(0,c∗).

A trivializing encoding is ruled out: the value is not a real supremum, the barrier strategy is constructed rather than assumed, and c∗<∞c^*<\inftyc∗<∞ is a conclusion.

A complete development needs:

  • Lévy processes and their Laplace exponents;
  • scale functions and the exit identity Ex[e−qT1{XT=a}]=W(x)/W(a)\mathbf E_x[e^{-qT}\mathbf 1_{\{X_T=a\}}]=W(x)/W(a)Ex​[e−qT1{XT​=a}​]=W(x)/W(a);
  • reflected processes;
  • Itô's formula for jump semimartingales with finite-variation controls.

The Lévy and scale-function layer is shared with the companion mission on the bail-out problem. Contributions of general lemmas (Stieltjes integration by parts, optional stopping for càdlàg martingales) are welcome.

Selected references

  • F. Avram, Z. Palmowski, M. R. Pistorius, On the optimal dividend problem for a spectrally negative Lévy process, Ann. Appl. Probab. 17 (2007) 156–180. https://arxiv.org/abs/math/0702893
  • P. Azcue, N. Muler, Optimal reinsurance and dividend distribution policies in the Cramér–Lundberg model, Math. Finance 15 (2005) 261–308.
  • M. Jeanblanc-Picqué, A. N. Shiryaev, Optimization of the flow of dividends, Russian Math. Surveys 50 (1995) 257–277.
  • R. L. Loeffen, On optimality of the barrier strategy in de Finetti's dividend problem for spectrally negative Lévy processes, Ann. Appl. Probab. 18 (2008) 1669–1680.
  • A. E. Kyprianou, Introductory Lectures on Fluctuations of Lévy Processes with Applications, Springer, 2006. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-540-31343-4
31 thms3 active usersReviewed
Operations ResearchStochastic Systems·Captain: Shuze Chen

Processing Networks II: Subcriticality is Necessary for StabilityTextbook

Motivation

Before a queueing network's stability can be studied in any depth, a much cruder question has to be settled: is stability even possible for the given arrival rates and service capacities, under any control policy at all? For a single M/M/1 queue the answer is the familiar λ<μ\lambda < \muλ<μ, but a general stochastic processing network (SPN) — many buffers, many activities, servers that can be pooled or shared across job classes — has no single scalar "utilization" to compare against a threshold. J. G. Dai and J. Michael Harrison's Processing Networks: Fluid Models and Stability (Cambridge University Press, forthcoming; cited here from the authors' pre-publication draft, 2020-4-2, http://spnbook.org) answers this with a linear program: the static planning problem, first formulated by Harrison (2000). This mission formalizes the theorem that answers the crude question in one direction — no control policy can stabilize a network outside the region that program identifies — which is why, as the book puts it, "throughout the remainder of this book, attention is essentially restricted to subcritical networks."

Setting

An SPN has III buffers, indexed by i∈Ii \in \mathcal{I}i∈I, and JJJ activities, indexed by j∈Jj \in \mathcal{J}j∈J. Its first-order data — the quantities that matter for a capacity calculation, as opposed to full stochastic detail — are: the I×JI \times JI×J material requirement matrix BBB (BijB_{ij}Bij​ = number of class-iii items one type-jjj service consumes), the I×JI \times JI×J mean output matrix Γ\GammaΓ (its jjjth column is the expected output vector of a type-jjj service), the mean service times mj>0m_j > 0mj​>0, the K×JK \times JK×J capacity consumption matrix AAA (server pool kkk against activity jjj), and the server-pool capacities b∈R+Kb \in \mathbb{R}_+^Kb∈R+K​. From these,

R:=(B−Γ)M−1,M:=diag⁡(m1,…,mJ),R := (B - \Gamma)M^{-1}, \qquad M := \operatorname{diag}(m_1, \dots, m_J),R:=(B−Γ)M−1,M:=diag(m1​,…,mJ​),

so that RijR_{ij}Rij​ is the long-run average rate at which activity jjj depletes buffer iii's content.

Given an arrival-rate vector λ∈R+I\lambda \in \mathbb{R}_+^Iλ∈R+I​, the static planning problem (SPP) is the linear program

γ∗(λ):=min⁡x≥0, γ γs.t.Rx=λ,Ax≤γb,\gamma^\ast(\lambda) := \min_{x \ge 0,\, \gamma} \ \gamma \quad \text{s.t.} \quad Rx = \lambda, \quad Ax \le \gamma b,γ∗(λ):=x≥0,γmin​ γs.t.Rx=λ,Ax≤γb,

whose decision variable xjx_jxj​ is a long-run average activity rate and whose objective γ\gammaγ upper-bounds every server pool's utilization. The network is subcritical at λ\lambdaλ if γ∗(λ)<1\gamma^\ast(\lambda) < 1γ∗(λ)<1, and the subcritical region is Λ:={λ:γ∗(λ)<1}\Lambda := \{\lambda : \gamma^\ast(\lambda) < 1\}Λ:={λ:γ∗(λ)<1}.

An SPN is stable (Definition 3.6, mission I) when its ambient Markov chain is positive recurrent, equivalently has a unique stationary distribution, equivalently its buffer contents converge in distribution to a non-defective limit. This mission's chapter portion (Chapters 4-5) also treats three extensions used elsewhere in the book: a Markovian arrival process replacing independent Poisson arrivals; alternate routing with immediate commitment, where arrivals must be routed into an eligible buffer at the instant they arrive, with routing rates constrained by an augmented version of the SPP; and processor sharing (PS) networks, whose service discipline falls outside the book's ordinary relaxed-control framework and is instead analyzed through an equivalent head-of-line (EHL) model built to have the same generator.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 5.2 — only subcritical networks can be stable

(baseline stochastic assumptions) ∧ (Markov representation) ∧ (SPN stable)  ⟹  λ∈Λ.\text{(baseline stochastic assumptions)} \ \wedge \ \text{(Markov representation)} \ \wedge \ \text{(SPN stable)} \implies \lambda \in \Lambda.(baseline stochastic assumptions) ∧ (Markov representation) ∧ (SPN stable)⟹λ∈Λ.

This is the weakest target that captures the chapter's content: it asserts nothing about which policy achieves stability, or whether subcriticality is sufficient (Chapters 6 onward answer that, case by case, and Chapter 5 itself gives two counterexamples where it is not) — only that subcriticality is unconditionally necessary.

Further results (milestones)

Proposition 4.1 (a strong law of large numbers for class-level arrivals under randomized routing), Proposition 4.4 (PS-network stability reduces to EHL-model stability), Proposition 5.1 (for a unitary network, subcriticality reduces to the classical load condition ρ<b\rho < bρ<b), and Corollaries 5.4-5.6 (the same necessity conclusion under a Markovian arrival process, under alternate routing, and its consequence for maximally stable policies).

Significance

The result itself. Theorem 5.2 converts "can this network be stabilized at all?" from an open-ended search over control policies into a single linear-program feasibility check on first-order data alone. Corollary 5.6 turns this into the standard proof template every later chapter uses: exhibit a policy whose implementation does not reference λ\lambdaλ, show it is stable throughout the subcritical region, and conclude maximal stability — without having to separately characterize the true stability region Λ∗\Lambda^\astΛ∗, which the book calls "a deep mathematical problem" in general.

Formalizing it. A search of the platform for "processing network," "static planning problem," and "linear program" returned no hits: the SPN-specific static planning problem — its decision variables xxx tied to a network's material-balance matrix RRR and capacity matrix AAA — has no existing counterpart, though the platform's linear-optimization field (16 missions) has general LP duality substrate a future proof of Proposition 5.1 or Theorem 5.2 could draw on. This mission is a from-scratch formalization of the SPP, the subcritical region, and the necessity theorem.

Difficulty

The natural first attempt states Theorem 5.2 as a claim about the buffer-contents process Z(t)Z(t)Z(t) directly. This fails to separate cleanly from the proof, because the actual argument passes through an auxiliary quantity — the stationary mean x:=Eπ[N(0)]x := \mathbb{E}_\pi[N(0)]x:=Eπ​[N(0)] under the chain's (unique, by stability) stationary distribution π\piπ — that has no meaning outside a specific proof strategy. The formalization instead states the goal purely in terms of the data (R,A,b)(R, A, b)(R,A,b) and the hypothesis of stability, exactly as the book's own statement does, leaving xxx's construction to the (currently sorry) proof. A second difficulty is Corollary 5.4's Markovian arrival process: naively reusing BaselineAssumptions with a non-Poisson arrival process is impossible, since Poisson-ness is a mandatory structural field of that definition, not an optional hypothesis — the corollary needs its own hypothesis structure that changes exactly the one clause Assumption 2.1(a) contributes and nothing else.

Formalization scope

Buffers and activities are Fin I, Fin J; matrices are Matrix over ℝ. The subcritical region is defined via the optimal SPP value γ∗\gamma^\astγ∗, formalized with Mathlib's IsLeast (attained infimum, matching the book's own "γ∗≤1\gamma^\ast \le 1γ∗≤1 iff xxx exists" phrasing, which presupposes attainment) rather than a bare existential — a formalization using, say, sInf would silently commit to junk values on an infeasible or unbounded LP and would not obviously match the book's own usage of γ∗\gamma^\astγ∗ as literally attained. The basic SPN model's full state-process construction (Sections 2.3-2.4) is not re-derived from scratch here; Theorem 5.2 instead takes the structural facts its own proof invokes — the capacity constraint AN(t)≤bAN(t) \le bAN(t)≤b (Eq. 2.11) and the material-requirement matrix BBB — as explicit data, reusing mission I's BaselineAssumptions and MarkovRepresentation for the stochastic and Markov-chain apparatus. Proposition 4.4's shared- generator fact between a PS network and its EHL model (the actual content the book's construction of Section 4.4 establishes) is likewise taken as an explicit hypothesis rather than rebuilt from the refined-class/phase-type machinery of Eqs. (4.19)-(4.29); reconstructing that machinery from scratch, or reproving Proposition 4.1's SLLN from the chain's strong Markov property at regeneration times, are both welcome future contributions. A formalization that stated Theorem 5.2 with Λ\LambdaΛ replaced by an unconstrained existential (dropping the LP structure entirely) would trivialize the chapter's actual content — the LP-feasibility characterization is what makes Λ\LambdaΛ checkable, and is preserved here in full.

Selected references

  • J. G. Dai and J. Michael Harrison, Processing Networks: Fluid Models and Stability, Cambridge University Press (forthcoming), pre-publication draft 2020-4-2. http://spnbook.org
  • J. M. Harrison, "Brownian models of open processing networks: canonical representation of workload," Annals of Applied Probability 10 (2000), 75-103.
  • J. G. Dai and W. Lin, "Maximum pressure policies in stochastic processing networks," Operations Research 53 (2005), 197-218.
13 thms3 active usersReviewed
Operations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Advance Demand Information, Price Discrimination, and Preorder Strategies: When Preorder Profit Increases with Demand CorrelationResearch Paper

Motivation

Firms that sell new products (consoles, books, films) often take preorders before release. A preorder serves two purposes at once. It lets the firm charge early adopters a different price from later buyers, a form of price discrimination, and the number of preorders is advance demand information: an early signal of how large regular-season demand will be. Li and Zhang (MSOM 15(1), 2013) ask whether better advance information always helps a seller who runs a preorder, when consumers are strategic and anticipate the seller's stocking decision. Their answer is no. The second-period stocking decision improves, but the preorder price can fall. Whether the net effect is positive depends on the low-type margin and the size of the early-adopter segment.

This mission formalizes that answer, §4 of the paper: the preorder profit as a function of the demand correlation ρ\rhoρ.

Setting

A seller sells a perishable product over two periods. High-type consumers, with valuation vHv_HvH​, arrive in the first period and may preorder at price p1p_1p1​. Low-type consumers, with valuation vL<vHv_L < v_HvL​<vH​, arrive in the second period, when the price is p2p_2p2​. A high type who waits values the product at δvH\delta v_HδvH​, where δ≤1\delta \le 1δ≤1 and δvH>vL\delta v_H > v_LδvH​>vL​. The unit cost is ccc, with 0<c<vL0 < c < v_L0<c<vL​. Unsold units have no salvage value and unmet demand carries no penalty. Write Δ=δvH−vL\Delta = \delta v_H - v_LΔ=δvH​−vL​.

The demands are jointly normal with correlation ρ∈[0,1)\rho \in [0,1)ρ∈[0,1). The high-type demand has mean μH\mu_HμH​, and XXX denotes its standardization, a standard normal variable. The low-type demand has mean μL\mu_LμL​, standard deviation σL\sigma_LσL​ and λL=μL/σL\lambda_L = \mu_L/\sigma_LλL​=μL​/σL​. Given X=xX = xX=x, the updated low-type demand X~L(x)\tilde X_L(x)X~L​(x) is normal with mean μ~L(x)=μL+ρσLx\tilde\mu_L(x) = \mu_L + \rho\sigma_L xμ~​L​(x)=μL​+ρσL​x and standard deviation σ~L=σL1−ρ2\tilde\sigma_L = \sigma_L\sqrt{1-\rho^2}σ~L​=σL​1−ρ2​. Φ\PhiΦ and ϕ\phiϕ are the standard normal distribution function and density, and zLz_LzL​ solves Φ(zL)=(vL−c)/vL\Phi(z_L) = (v_L - c)/v_LΦ(zL​)=(vL​−c)/vL​.

In the second period the seller charges p2=vLp_2 = v_Lp2​=vL​ and solves a newsvendor problem. It orders

Q(x)=μ~L(x)+zLσ~L(1)Q(x) = \tilde\mu_L(x) + z_L\tilde\sigma_L \qquad (1)Q(x)=μ~​L​(x)+zL​σ~L​(1)

and earns ΠL(x)=(vL−c)(μL+ρσLx)−vLϕ(zL)σL1−ρ2\Pi_L(x) = (v_L - c)(\mu_L + \rho\sigma_L x) - v_L\phi(z_L)\sigma_L\sqrt{1-\rho^2}ΠL​(x)=(vL​−c)(μL​+ρσL​x)−vL​ϕ(zL​)σL​1−ρ2​ (2). A waiting high type believes half of the remaining consumers will be served before her, so her belief of product availability is

ξ(ρ)=E[Pr⁡(X~L(X)2<Q(X))].(3)\xi(\rho) = \mathbb E\Big[\Pr\Big(\tfrac{\tilde X_L(X)}{2} < Q(X)\Big)\Big]. \qquad (3)ξ(ρ)=E[Pr(2X~L​(X)​<Q(X))].(3)

In the rational-expectations equilibrium every high type preorders at p1=vH−Δξp_1 = v_H - \Delta\xip1​=vH​−Δξ. The preorder profit is

Πp(ρ)=(vH−Δξ(ρ)−c)μH+ΠL(0).(4)\Pi^p(\rho) = (v_H - \Delta\xi(\rho) - c)\mu_H + \Pi_L(0). \qquad (4)Πp(ρ)=(vH​−Δξ(ρ)−c)μH​+ΠL​(0).(4)

The threshold is

μ~(ρ)=−vLϕ(zL)σL2ΔzL ϕ(2zL1−ρ2+λL).(6)\tilde\mu(\rho) = -\frac{v_L\phi(z_L)\sigma_L}{2\Delta z_L\,\phi\big(2z_L\sqrt{1-\rho^2} + \lambda_L\big)}. \qquad (6)μ~​(ρ)=−2ΔzL​ϕ(2zL​1−ρ2​+λL​)vL​ϕ(zL​)σL​​.(6)

Formalization targets

Goal: PROPOSITION 2

(i) c<vL<2c: Πp strictly increases on every interval where μH<μ~(ρ),and strictly decreases on every interval where μH≥μ~(ρ);(ii) vL≥2c: Πp strictly increases on [0,1).\begin{aligned} &\text{(i) } c < v_L < 2c:\ \Pi^p \text{ strictly increases on every interval where } \mu_H < \tilde\mu(\rho),\\ &\qquad\text{and strictly decreases on every interval where } \mu_H \ge \tilde\mu(\rho);\\ &\text{(ii) } v_L \ge 2c:\ \Pi^p \text{ strictly increases on } [0,1). \end{aligned}​(i) c<vL​<2c: Πp strictly increases on every interval where μH​<μ~​(ρ),and strictly decreases on every interval where μH​≥μ~​(ρ);(ii) vL​≥2c: Πp strictly increases on [0,1).​

Milestones

  1. (1)–(2): Q(x)Q(x)Q(x) is the unique maximizer of E[vLmin⁡(Q,X~L(x))−cQ]\mathbb E[v_L\min(Q,\tilde X_L(x)) - cQ]E[vL​min(Q,X~L​(x))−cQ], and its value is ΠL(x)\Pi_L(x)ΠL​(x).
  2. (3): ξ(ρ)=E[Φ((λL+ρX)/1−ρ2+2zL)]\xi(\rho) = \mathbb E\big[\Phi\big((\lambda_L + \rho X)/\sqrt{1-\rho^2} + 2z_L\big)\big]ξ(ρ)=E[Φ((λL​+ρX)/1−ρ2​+2zL​)].
  3. LEMMA 1(i): if c<vL<2cc < v_L < 2cc<vL​<2c, then zL<0z_L < 0zL​<0 and ξ\xiξ is strictly increasing in ρ\rhoρ.
  4. LEMMA 1(ii): if vL≥2cv_L \ge 2cvL​≥2c, then zL≥0z_L \ge 0zL​≥0 and ξ\xiξ is non-increasing in ρ\rhoρ, strictly so when vL>2cv_L > 2cvL​>2c.
  5. After (5): ddρΠL(0)=vLϕ(zL)σL ρ/1−ρ2>0\dfrac{d}{d\rho}\Pi_L(0) = v_L\phi(z_L)\sigma_L\,\rho/\sqrt{1-\rho^2} > 0dρd​ΠL​(0)=vL​ϕ(zL​)σL​ρ/1−ρ2​>0 for ρ∈(0,1)\rho \in (0,1)ρ∈(0,1).
  6. PROPOSITION 2(i), pointwise: for ρ∈(0,1)\rho \in (0,1)ρ∈(0,1), dΠp/dρ>0  ⟺  μH<μ~(ρ)d\Pi^p/d\rho > 0 \iff \mu_H < \tilde\mu(\rho)dΠp/dρ>0⟺μH​<μ~​(ρ) and dΠp/dρ<0  ⟺  μH>μ~(ρ)d\Pi^p/d\rho < 0 \iff \mu_H > \tilde\mu(\rho)dΠp/dρ<0⟺μH​>μ~​(ρ).
  7. LEMMA 2(i): if −λL/2<zL<0-\lambda_L/2 < z_L < 0−λL​/2<zL​<0, then μ~\tilde\muμ~​ is strictly increasing in ρ\rhoρ.
  8. LEMMA 2(ii): if zL≤−λL/2z_L \le -\lambda_L/2zL​≤−λL​/2, then μ~\tilde\muμ~​ is quasi-convex in ρ\rhoρ.

Significance

The proposition splits the value of advance demand information into two effects with opposite signs. Better information always raises the second-period profit (milestone 5). Its effect on the preorder price depends on the margin. When vL<2cv_L < 2cvL​<2c, the seller stocks below the conditional mean. A more precise forecast then raises the stock and the availability ξ\xiξ, and waiting becomes more attractive, which lowers the preorder price. The threshold μ~(ρ)\tilde\mu(\rho)μ~​(ρ) says which effect wins, and LEMMA 2 describes its shape. This is the basis for the paper's later comparisons of preorder, price-guarantee and no-preorder strategies.

The paper states these results and leaves the proofs to an online appendix. None of them has a machine-checked proof. A complete development would also give reusable facts about normal laws: the expectation E[Φ(a+bX)]\mathbb E[\Phi(a + bX)]E[Φ(a+bX)] for standard normal XXX, the normal newsvendor solution with its closed-form optimal profit, and derivatives of Gaussian integrals with respect to a correlation parameter.

Difficulty

The model is explicit, so the difficulty is not in modelling. It is in turning the two expectations into closed forms and differentiating them. The availability ξ\xiξ is an integral over XXX of a normal probability whose mean and variance both move with ρ\rhoρ. The expected newsvendor profit involves E[min⁡(Q,Y)]\mathbb E[\min(Q, Y)]E[min(Q,Y)] for a normal YYY. Neither closed form is in Mathlib, and neither is a derivative in ρ\rhoρ of a Gaussian integral. The obvious route, differentiating under the integral sign in (3), needs domination estimates that are uniform in ρ\rhoρ near each point, and these degenerate as ρ→1\rho \to 1ρ→1.

Signs are the second difficulty. zLz_LzL​ changes sign at vL=2cv_L = 2cvL​=2c, μ~\tilde\muμ~​ carries a leading minus and divides by zLz_LzL​, and the derivative of Πp\Pi^pΠp vanishes at ρ=0\rho = 0ρ=0 and wherever μ~(ρ)=μH\tilde\mu(\rho) = \mu_Hμ~​(ρ)=μH​. Strict monotonicity on an interval has to be recovered from a derivative that is positive except at finitely many points.

Formalization scope

Everything lives in the namespace PreorderADI.Correlation. A structure Params holds vH,vL,c,δ,μH,μL,σL,zLv_H, v_L, c, \delta, \mu_H, \mu_L, \sigma_L, z_LvH​,vL​,c,δ,μH​,μL​,σL​,zL​. The predicate Params.Standing records the model's assumptions: vH>vLv_H > v_LvH​>vL​, c<vLc < v_Lc<vL​, δ≤1\delta \le 1δ≤1 and δvH>vL\delta v_H > v_LδvH​>vL​, together with Φ(zL)=(vL−c)/vL\Phi(z_L) = (v_L-c)/v_LΦ(zL​)=(vL​−c)/vL​. σH\sigma_HσH​ is omitted because nothing in §4 uses it after standardization. Φ\PhiΦ is ProbabilityTheory.cdf (gaussianReal 0 1) and ϕ\phiϕ is gaussianPDFReal 0 1. The normal law with mean mmm and standard deviation sss is gaussianReal m (s^2).

The formalization commits to the following conventions and additions:

  • Added hypotheses. Four hypotheses are added to the page's assumptions:
    • c>0c > 0c>0, so that zLz_LzL​ exists;
    • σL>0\sigma_L > 0σL​>0, so that the conditional law is a genuine normal law;
    • μL>0\mu_L > 0μL​>0, so that λL>0\lambda_L > 0λL​>0, as LEMMA 2 presupposes;
    • μH>0\mu_H > 0μH​>0, which PROPOSITION 2(ii) needs.
  • zLz_LzL​. zLz_LzL​ is a parameter pinned down by Φ(zL)=(vL−c)/vL\Phi(z_L) = (v_L-c)/v_LΦ(zL​)=(vL​−c)/vL​, not an inverse function with junk values.
  • Range of ρ\rhoρ. ρ\rhoρ ranges over [0,1)[0,1)[0,1), the paper's "we will focus on ρ≥0\rho \ge 0ρ≥0" together with ρ<1\rho < 1ρ<1. Derivative statements use (0,1)(0,1)(0,1).
  • ξ\xiξ and Πp\Pi^pΠp. ξ\xiξ is defined as the first expression of (3), the expected probability, so that no closed form is assumed. Πp\Pi^pΠp is defined by (4). PROPOSITION 1, which derives (4) as the unique equilibrium profit, is not formalized: the paper defines the equilibrium only through conditions that already assume every high type preorders.
  • Monotonicity. "Increases in ρ\rhoρ when μH<μ~(ρ)\mu_H < \tilde\mu(\rho)μH​<μ~​(ρ)" is formalized as strict monotonicity on every order-connected I⊆[0,1)I \subseteq [0,1)I⊆[0,1) on which the condition holds. "Decreasing" in LEMMA 1(ii) is non-strict, since ξ\xiξ is constant when vL=2cv_L = 2cvL​=2c. Quasi-convexity is Mathlib's QuasiconvexOn.
  • The ε_v sentence is omitted. PROPOSITION 2(i) also claims that some εv>0\varepsilon_v > 0εv​>0 makes Πp\Pi^pΠp always decrease when vL<c+εvv_L < c + \varepsilon_vvL​<c+εv​. That claim is false in the paper's own model. As vL↓cv_L \downarrow cvL​↓c, μ~(ρ)→∞\tilde\mu(\rho) \to \inftyμ~​(ρ)→∞ for ρ\rhoρ below roughly 3/2\sqrt 3/23​/2, so Πp\Pi^pΠp increases there for every fixed μH\mu_HμH​. The paper's Figure 1 shows the same behaviour.
  • Out of scope. §5 rests on an approximation that treats normal demands as nonnegative, so it is excluded. §§6–7 depend on models given only in the online appendix and are excluded too.

A statement about the closed form Φ(λL+2zL1−ρ2)\Phi(\lambda_L + 2z_L\sqrt{1-\rho^2})Φ(λL​+2zL​1−ρ2​) in place of ξ\xiξ would make LEMMA 1 a one-line monotonicity fact. So would a definition of Πp\Pi^pΠp that bypasses (3). The definitions rule both out.

Welcome contributions include proofs of the milestones, general Mathlib-style lemmas on Gaussian expectations of Φ\PhiΦ and of min⁡(Q,Y)\min(Q, Y)min(Q,Y), and a formalization of PROPOSITION 1 from conditions (i)–(v).

Selected references

  • C. Li and F. Zhang, Advance Demand Information, Price Discrimination, and Preorder Strategies, Manufacturing & Service Operations Management 15(1):57–71, 2013. https://doi.org/10.1287/msom.1120.0398
  • G. P. Cachon and R. Swinney, Purchasing, Pricing, and Quick Response in the Presence of Strategic Consumers, Management Science 55(3):497–511, 2009. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.1080.0948
  • X. Su and F. Zhang, On the Value of Commitment and Availability Guarantees When Selling to Strategic Consumers, Management Science 55(5):713–726, 2009. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.1080.0967
10 thms3 active usersReviewed
Information TheoryOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Worst-Case Value-At-Risk and Robust Portfolio Optimization: A Conic Programming Approach 2: Closed Form of the Entropy-Constrained Worst-Case VaRResearch Paper

Motivation

Value-at-Risk (VaR) is the loss level that a portfolio exceeds with probability at most ε\varepsilonε. It is the standard risk measure of banking regulation, and its classical computation assumes Gaussian returns: for a Gaussian return vector with mean x^\hat xx^ and covariance Γ\GammaΓ it equals −Φ−1(ε)w⊤Γw−x^⊤w-\Phi^{-1}(\varepsilon)\sqrt{w^\top\Gamma w} - \hat x^\top w−Φ−1(ε)w⊤Γw​−x^⊤w, where Φ\PhiΦ is the standard normal distribution function. Real returns are not exactly Gaussian, and a VaR computed from a misspecified distribution can badly understate risk.

El Ghaoui, Oks and Oustry (Oper. Res. 51(4), 2003) replace the single distribution by a class P\mathcal PP of distributions and define the worst-case VaR as the smallest loss level whose probability is at most ε\varepsilonε under every distribution of the class. Their first class, distributions with a given mean and covariance, leads to the Chebyshev-type bound of their Theorem 1, whose worst case is attained by discrete distributions. §4.2 of the paper asks instead for distributions that stay close to a Gaussian, measured by relative entropy (Kullback–Leibler divergence). Such balls are the basic uncertainty sets of distributionally robust optimization and of robust control in economics (Hansen and Sargent's multiplier and constraint preferences), and they give a smooth worst case. Theorem 9 computes the resulting worst-case VaR in closed form.

Setting

Returns are random vectors x∈Rnx \in \mathbb R^nx∈Rn and a portfolio is a vector w∈Rnw \in \mathbb R^nw∈Rn with w≠0w \neq 0w=0; its return is r(w,x)=w⊤xr(w,x) = w^\top xr(w,x)=w⊤x. For a level γ∈R\gamma \in \mathbb Rγ∈R the loss set is Sγ={x:γ≤−x⊤w}\mathcal S_\gamma = \{x : \gamma \le -x^\top w\}Sγ​={x:γ≤−x⊤w} (Eq. 13 of the paper).

Given a class P\mathcal PP of probability distributions on Rn\mathbb R^nRn and ε∈(0,1)\varepsilon \in (0,1)ε∈(0,1), the worst-case Value-at-Risk (Eq. 4) is

VP(w)=min⁡{γ∈R:sup⁡P∈PP(Sγ)≤ε}.V_{\mathcal P}(w) = \min\Big\{\gamma \in \mathbb R : \sup_{P \in \mathcal P} P(\mathcal S_\gamma) \le \varepsilon\Big\}.VP​(w)=min{γ∈R:P∈Psup​P(Sγ​)≤ε}.

Fix a mean x^∈Rn\hat x \in \mathbb R^nx^∈Rn and a positive definite covariance Γ≻0\Gamma \succ 0Γ≻0, and let P0=N(x^,Γ)P_0 = \mathcal N(\hat x, \Gamma)P0​=N(x^,Γ) be the reference Gaussian. For d≥0d \ge 0d≥0 the relative-entropy class (Eq. 43) is

Pd={P probability on Rn:KL(P,P0)=∫log⁡dPdP0 dP≤d},\mathcal P_d = \Big\{P \text{ probability on } \mathbb R^n : \mathrm{KL}(P, P_0) = \int \log\frac{dP}{dP_0}\,dP \le d\Big\},Pd​={P probability on Rn:KL(P,P0​)=∫logdP0​dP​dP≤d},

with KL(P,P0)=+∞\mathrm{KL}(P,P_0) = +\inftyKL(P,P0​)=+∞ unless PPP is absolutely continuous with respect to P0P_0P0​.

The risk factor (Eq. 45) is

f(ε,d)=sup⁡λ>0eε/λ−d−1e1/λ−1,κ(ε,d)=−Φ−1(f(ε,d)),f(\varepsilon,d) = \sup_{\lambda>0}\frac{e^{\varepsilon/\lambda - d} - 1}{e^{1/\lambda} - 1}, \qquad \kappa(\varepsilon,d) = -\Phi^{-1}\big(f(\varepsilon,d)\big),f(ε,d)=λ>0sup​e1/λ−1eε/λ−d−1​,κ(ε,d)=−Φ−1(f(ε,d)),

and the Gaussian tail of the loss set is ϕ(γ)=P0(Sγ)=1−Φ((γ+w⊤x^)/w⊤Γw)\phi(\gamma) = P_0(\mathcal S_\gamma) = 1 - \Phi\big((\gamma + w^\top\hat x)/\sqrt{w^\top\Gamma w}\big)ϕ(γ)=P0​(Sγ​)=1−Φ((γ+w⊤x^)/w⊤Γw​).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 9 (p. 553)

For Γ≻0\Gamma \succ 0Γ≻0, w≠0w \neq 0w=0, d≥0d \ge 0d≥0 and 0<ε<10 < \varepsilon < 10<ε<1, the minimum in (4) over Pd\mathcal P_dPd​ exists and

VPd(w)=κ(ε,d)w⊤Γw−x^⊤w.(44)V_{\mathcal P_d}(w) = \kappa(\varepsilon,d)\sqrt{w^\top\Gamma w} - \hat x^\top w. \tag{44}VPd​​(w)=κ(ε,d)w⊤Γw​−x^⊤w.(44)

Milestones

The milestones follow the proof of Theorem 9 on pp. 553–554, in attack order.

  1. Eq. (45). The two expressions of fff agree: sup⁡λ>0eε/λ−d−1e1/λ−1=sup⁡v>0e−d(v+1)ε−1v\sup_{\lambda>0}\frac{e^{\varepsilon/\lambda-d}-1}{e^{1/\lambda}-1} = \sup_{v>0}\frac{e^{-d}(v+1)^\varepsilon - 1}{v}supλ>0​e1/λ−1eε/λ−d−1​=supv>0​ve−d(v+1)ε−1​.
  2. Gaussian tail. P0(Sγ)=1−Φ((γ+w⊤x^)/w⊤Γw)P_0(\mathcal S_\gamma) = 1 - \Phi\big((\gamma + w^\top\hat x)/\sqrt{w^\top\Gamma w}\big)P0​(Sγ​)=1−Φ((γ+w⊤x^)/w⊤Γw​).
  3. Eq. (47). For λ>0\lambda > 0λ>0, the Lagrangian L(Q)=Q(Sγ)+λ0(1−Q(Rn))+λ(d−KL-integral)L(Q) = Q(\mathcal S_\gamma) + \lambda_0(1 - Q(\mathbb R^n)) + \lambda(d - \mathrm{KL}\text{-integral})L(Q)=Q(Sγ​)+λ0​(1−Q(Rn))+λ(d−KL-integral) is maximised over finite measures Q≪P0Q \ll P_0Q≪P0​ by the exponentially tilted density dQ⋆/dP0=exp⁡((χS−λ0)/λ−1)dQ^\star/dP_0 = \exp((\chi_{\mathcal S} - \lambda_0)/\lambda - 1)dQ⋆/dP0​=exp((χS​−λ0​)/λ−1), with value
θ(λ0,λ)=λ0+λd+λe−λ0/λ−1((e1/λ−1)ϕ(γ)+1).\theta(\lambda_0,\lambda) = \lambda_0 + \lambda d + \lambda e^{-\lambda_0/\lambda - 1}\big((e^{1/\lambda}-1)\phi(\gamma) + 1\big).θ(λ0​,λ)=λ0​+λd+λe−λ0​/λ−1((e1/λ−1)ϕ(γ)+1).
  1. Eq. (48). min⁡λ0∈Rθ(λ0,λ)=λd+λlog⁡((e1/λ−1)ϕ(γ)+1)\min_{\lambda_0\in\mathbb R}\theta(\lambda_0,\lambda) = \lambda d + \lambda\log\big((e^{1/\lambda}-1)\phi(\gamma)+1\big)minλ0​∈R​θ(λ0​,λ)=λd+λlog((e1/λ−1)ϕ(γ)+1).
  2. Duality. sup⁡P∈PdP(Sγ)=inf⁡λ>0(λd+λlog⁡((e1/λ−1)ϕ(γ)+1))\sup_{P\in\mathcal P_d} P(\mathcal S_\gamma) = \inf_{\lambda>0}\big(\lambda d + \lambda\log((e^{1/\lambda}-1)\phi(\gamma)+1)\big)supP∈Pd​​P(Sγ​)=infλ>0​(λd+λlog((e1/λ−1)ϕ(γ)+1)).
  3. Inversion. For d>0d > 0d>0: some λ>0\lambda > 0λ>0 makes the dual value at most ε\varepsilonε if and only if γ≥κ(ε,d)w⊤Γw−w⊤x^\gamma \ge \kappa(\varepsilon,d)\sqrt{w^\top\Gamma w} - w^\top\hat xγ≥κ(ε,d)w⊤Γw​−w⊤x^.
  4. Remark after Theorem 9. f(ε,0)=εf(\varepsilon, 0) = \varepsilonf(ε,0)=ε, so κ(ε,0)=−Φ−1(ε)\kappa(\varepsilon,0) = -\Phi^{-1}(\varepsilon)κ(ε,0)=−Φ−1(ε). The risk factor κ(ε,d)\kappa(\varepsilon, d)κ(ε,d) is strictly increasing in d≥0d \ge 0d≥0.

Significance

Theorem 9 says that an entropy ball around a Gaussian leaves the form of the Gaussian VaR unchanged: only the risk factor moves, from −Φ−1(ε)-\Phi^{-1}(\varepsilon)−Φ−1(ε) to κ(ε,d)\kappa(\varepsilon,d)κ(ε,d), a scalar computed by a one-dimensional maximisation. The worst-case VaR therefore stays a convex function of www whenever κ≥0\kappa \ge 0κ≥0, and minimising it over a polytope of portfolios is a second-order cone program (problem (3) of the paper). The number f(ε,d)f(\varepsilon,d)f(ε,d) is the largest ppp with KL(Bernoulli(ε) ∥ Bernoulli(p))≤d\mathrm{KL}(\mathrm{Bernoulli}(\varepsilon)\,\|\,\mathrm{Bernoulli}(p)) \le dKL(Bernoulli(ε)∥Bernoulli(p))≤d, which ties the result to the binary-divergence bounds used throughout information theory.

The theorem was proved in 2003. The worst-case-probability step (milestone 5) is an instance of the Donsker–Varadhan / Gibbs variational duality for relative-entropy balls, which the paper imports from the literature (Smith 1995). No machine-checked proof of Theorem 9 or of this duality on Rn\mathbb R^nRn is known. A formalization would give a verified closed form for a relative-entropy distributionally robust chance constraint, and the duality and tilting lemmas would serve any mission on KL-ball robust optimization.

Difficulty

The obvious argument is Lagrangian duality for the infinite-dimensional problem sup⁡{P(Sγ):KL(P,P0)≤d}\sup\{P(\mathcal S_\gamma) : \mathrm{KL}(P,P_0) \le d\}sup{P(Sγ​):KL(P,P0​)≤d}. Weak duality and the pointwise maximisation that produces the tilted density are elementary. The difficulty is the step the paper cites rather than proves: that the duality gap is zero, and that the supremum over distributions equals the infimum of the dual over λ>0\lambda > 0λ>0. The feasible set is a set of measures, the objective is an indicator, and the constraint is a divergence that is +∞+\infty+∞ off a set of absolutely continuous measures, so a finite-dimensional Slater argument does not apply as stated.

The second difficulty is at the boundary of the parameters. At d=0d = 0d=0 the supremum defining f(ε,0)f(\varepsilon,0)f(ε,0) is approached only as λ→∞\lambda \to \inftyλ→∞, so the final inversion step behaves differently from d>0d > 0d>0. At ε=1\varepsilon = 1ε=1 the theorem is false, since every level γ\gammaγ is feasible and (4) has no minimum.

Formalization scope

Returns live in EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n). P0P_0P0​ is Mathlib's multivariateGaussian xhat Γ with Γ.PosDef, and KL\mathrm{KL}KL is InformationTheory.klDiv, which is ∞\infty∞ unless P≪P0P \ll P_0P≪P0​ with integrable log-likelihood ratio and equals ∫log⁡dPdP0 dP\int\log\frac{dP}{dP_0}\,dP∫logdP0​dP​dP otherwise for probability measures. The class Pd\mathcal P_dPd​ requires IsProbabilityMeasure P. Φ\PhiΦ is cdf (gaussianReal 0 1), and Φ−1(p)\Phi^{-1}(p)Φ−1(p) is defined as inf⁡{t:p≤Φ(t)}\inf\{t : p \le \Phi(t)\}inf{t:p≤Φ(t)}, which inverts Φ\PhiΦ on (0,1)(0,1)(0,1). The quadratic form w⊤Γww^\top\Gamma ww⊤Γw is a double sum, and ∥Γ1/2w∥2\|\Gamma^{1/2}w\|_2∥Γ1/2w∥2​ is written w⊤Γw\sqrt{w^\top\Gamma w}w⊤Γw​.

Conventions the Lean statements commit to:

  • "min" in (4) is IsLeast of the feasible set {γ:P(Sγ)≤ε ∀P∈Pd}\{\gamma : P(\mathcal S_\gamma) \le \varepsilon \ \forall P \in \mathcal P_d\}{γ:P(Sγ​)≤ε ∀P∈Pd​}. "sup⁡PP(Sγ)≤ε\sup_{P}P(\mathcal S_\gamma) \le \varepsilonsupP​P(Sγ​)≤ε" is written "for every PPP", with probabilities compared in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞].
  • The paper prints ε∈(0,1]\varepsilon \in (0,1]ε∈(0,1]. The mission assumes 0<ε<10 < \varepsilon < 10<ε<1, because the goal is false at ε=1\varepsilon = 1ε=1.
  • w≠0w \neq 0w=0 is the paper's assumption that the admissible set of portfolios excludes 000.
  • f(ε,d)f(\varepsilon,d)f(ε,d) is a Lean sSup of a set that is nonempty and bounded above by 111 for ε≤1\varepsilon \le 1ε≤1, d≥0d \ge 0d≥0.
  • The duality of milestone 5 is stated as the existence of one real number that is both the least upper bound of the worst-case probabilities and the greatest lower bound of the dual values, not as an equality of Lean's sSup and sInf.
  • Eq. (48) is stated as an attained minimum (IsLeast), which the calculus gives.
  • Milestone 3 works with finite measures Q≪P0Q \ll P_0Q≪P0​ with integrable log-likelihood ratio in place of the paper's densities ppp. It uses the complement of Sγ\mathcal S_\gammaSγ​ where the paper writes {γ≥−x⊤w}\{\gamma \ge -x^\top w\}{γ≥−x⊤w}, which differs by a P0P_0P0​-null hyperplane.
  • Milestone 6 assumes d>0d > 0d>0; the goal keeps d≥0d \ge 0d≥0.

Restricting Pd\mathcal P_dPd​ to {P0}\{P_0\}{P0​}, dropping IsProbabilityMeasure, or taking an arbitrary reference measure would trivialize or change the theorem. The class is the full KL ball around the nondegenerate Gaussian.

Infrastructure a complete development needs: the pushforward of a multivariate Gaussian under a linear functional (a one-dimensional Gaussian), the Gibbs variational principle for relative entropy, the strong duality for KL balls, and properties of Φ\PhiΦ and its quantile (continuity, strict monotonicity, symmetry Φ(−t)=1−Φ(t)\Phi(-t) = 1 - \Phi(t)Φ(−t)=1−Φ(t)). The Gaussian-quantile and KL-ball duality lemmas are reusable beyond this mission. Contributions of any of these as separate lemmas are welcome.

Selected references

  • L. El Ghaoui, M. Oks, F. Oustry, Worst-Case Value-at-Risk and Robust Portfolio Optimization: A Conic Programming Approach, Operations Research 51(4):543–556, 2003. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.51.4.543.16101
  • J. E. Smith, Generalized Chebychev Inequalities: Theory and Applications in Decision Analysis, Operations Research 43(5):807–825, 1995. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.43.5.807
  • M. D. Donsker, S. R. S. Varadhan, Asymptotic evaluation of certain Markov process expectations for large time, I, Communications on Pure and Applied Mathematics 28(1):1–47, 1975. https://doi.org/10.1002/cpa.3160280102
  • L. P. Hansen, T. J. Sargent, Robust Control and Model Uncertainty, American Economic Review 91(2):60–66, 2001. https://doi.org/10.1257/aer.91.2.60
9 thms3 active usersReviewed
Algorithmic Game TheoryMachine LearningStatistics·Captain: mikedeng1

Calibrated Learning and Correlated Equilibrium III: A Randomized Forecast Calibrated against Every OpponentResearch Paper

Motivation

A forecaster who announces "70% chance of rain" is calibrated if, among the days on which that number was announced, it rained on about 70% of them. Dawid (The well-calibrated Bayesian, JASA 1982) proposed calibration as the minimal requirement of an honest probability forecaster. Oakes (Self-calibrating priors do not exist, JASA 1985) showed that no deterministic forecasting rule can be calibrated against every sequence of outcomes: an adversary who knows the rule can always choose the outcome that contradicts the forecast.

Foster and Vohra (Calibrated learning and correlated equilibrium, Games Econ. Behav. 21 (1997) 40–55) use calibration as the bridge between learning and equilibrium in repeated games. Their Theorem 1 says that if each player best-responds to calibrated forecasts of the opponent, the empirical distribution of play converges to the set of correlated equilibria. That theorem is only useful if calibrated forecasts can actually be produced whatever the opponent does. Theorem 3 of the paper, credited to an unpublished 1991 manuscript of the same authors and proved in the paper's Appendix, says they can, provided the forecaster randomizes.

Timeline. Dawid (1982) defines calibration. Oakes (1985) rules out deterministic calibrated forecasting against arbitrary sequences. Foster and Vohra (1991 manuscript; 1997 paper, Theorem 3 and Appendix) give a randomized forecaster calibrated against any opponent, through a pairwise ("internal") no-regret property. The full argument appeared in Foster and Vohra, Asymptotic calibration, Biometrika 85 (1998). Hart and Mas-Colell (A simple adaptive procedure leading to correlated equilibrium, Econometrica 2000) later made internal regret the standard route to correlated equilibrium.

Setting

Player 2 has n≥1n\ge 1n≥1 pure strategies j∈{0,…,n−1}j\in\{0,\dots,n-1\}j∈{0,…,n−1}. In every round, player 1 announces a forecast p∈Rnp\in\mathbb R^np∈Rn, a probability vector (pj≥0p_j\ge 0pj​≥0, ∑jpj=1\sum_j p_j = 1∑j​pj​=1), and player 2 plays a strategy jjj. The two moves are simultaneous: player 2 does not see the current forecast.

A history hhh of length ttt is the list of the ttt pairs (forecast, play), oldest first. For a forecast vector ppp and a strategy jjj:

  • N(p,t)N(p,t)N(p,t) is the number of rounds of hhh in which ppp was forecast;
  • ρ(p,j,t)\rho(p,j,t)ρ(p,j,t) is the fraction of those rounds in which player 2 played jjj (and 000 if N(p,t)=0N(p,t)=0N(p,t)=0);
  • the calibration score (Eq. (1), p. 49) is
Ct=∑p∑j∣ρ(p,j,t)−pj∣ N(p,t)t.C_t = \sum_p\sum_j \bigl|\rho(p,j,t) - p_j\bigr|\,\frac{N(p,t)}{t}.Ct​=p∑​j∑​​ρ(p,j,t)−pj​​tN(p,t)​.

A randomized forecaster FFF maps each history to a probability distribution on forecasts. A learning rule AAA of player 2 maps each history to a probability distribution on strategies. In round t+1t+1t+1 the forecast is drawn from F(h)F(h)F(h) and the play from A(h)A(h)A(h), independently given the history hhh of the first ttt rounds. This defines the law PF,A\mathbb P_{F,A}PF,A​ of the first ttt rounds (histLaw F A t).

For the Appendix: with kkk forecasts, losses LtiL_t^iLti​ and mixing weights wtiw_t^iwti​, the pairwise regret of replacing forecast iii by forecast jjj is

RTi→j=max⁡{0, ∑t=1Twti (Lti−Ltj)}.R_T^{i\to j} = \max\Bigl\{0,\ \sum_{t=1}^T w_t^i\,(L_t^i - L_t^j)\Bigr\}.RTi→j​=max{0, t=1∑T​wti​(Lti​−Ltj​)}.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3 (p. 49)

There is a forecaster FFF, with probability-vector forecasts, such that for every learning rule AAA of player 2 and every ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0,

lim⁡t→∞PF,A(Ct<ε)=1.\lim_{t\to\infty}\mathbb P_{F,A}\bigl(C_t<\varepsilon\bigr) = 1.t→∞lim​PF,A​(Ct​<ε)=1.

The forecaster is fixed before the opponent; no rate is claimed, and the rate may depend on AAA.

Milestones, in the order the Appendix uses them

  1. Flow conservation is solvable (p. 52). For every nonnegative k×kk\times kk×k matrix RRR, k≥1k\ge 1k≥1, there is a probability vector www with wi∑jRi→j=∑jwjRj→iw^i\sum_j R^{i\to j} = \sum_j w^j R^{j\to i}wi∑j​Ri→j=∑j​wjRj→i for all iii.
  2. Lemma 1 (No-Regret) (p. 52). With losses in [0,1][0,1][0,1] and weights solving flow conservation for the previous regrets,
RTi→j≤2kTfor all i,j,T.R_T^{i\to j}\le\sqrt{2kT}\quad\text{for all } i,j,T.RTi→j​≤2kT​for all i,j,T.
  1. Regrets sandwich L-2 calibration (p. 54). For a grid p1,…,pkp^1,\dots,p^kp1,…,pk that is ε\varepsilonε-dense in squared distance and losses Lti=∣Xt−pi∣2L_t^i = |X_t - p^i|^2Lti​=∣Xt​−pi∣2,
∑imax⁡jRTi→jT ≤ C2,w(T) ≤ ε+∑imax⁡jRTi→jT,\sum_i\max_j \frac{R_T^{i\to j}}{T}\ \le\ C_{2,w}(T)\ \le\ \varepsilon + \sum_i\max_j\frac{R_T^{i\to j}}{T},i∑​jmax​TRTi→j​​ ≤ C2,w​(T) ≤ ε+i∑​jmax​TRTi→j​​,

with C2,wC_{2,w}C2,w​ the fractional L-2 calibration score. 4. L-1 versus L-2 (p. 54). For each jjj, ∑p∣ρ(p,j,t)−pj∣ N(p,t)/t≤∑p(ρ(p,j,t)−pj)2N(p,t)/t\sum_p|\rho(p,j,t)-p_j|\,N(p,t)/t \le \sqrt{\sum_p(\rho(p,j,t)-p_j)^2 N(p,t)/t}∑p​∣ρ(p,j,t)−pj​∣N(p,t)/t≤∑p​(ρ(p,j,t)−pj​)2N(p,t)/t​.

Significance

The result. Theorem 3 makes the hypothesis of Theorem 1 attainable: combined, they show that there are learning procedures under which play converges in probability to the set of correlated equilibria of any finite game (the paper's Corollary, p. 49). The intermediate Lemma 1 is an early internal-regret bound; internal (swap) regret minimization later became the standard algorithmic route to correlated equilibria and to calibrated prediction in online learning.

Formalizing it. The result is proved, in the 1997 Appendix in telegraphic form and in full in Foster and Vohra (1998). The Appendix leaves several steps informal (see Formalization scope), so a machine-checked proof must supply them. No formalization of calibration or of internal regret was found on Prove2Me as of 2026-09-26. The mission produces a formal model of randomized forecasters against adaptive opponents, a checked internal-regret bound with an explicit constant, and the passage from regret to calibration.

Difficulty

The obvious approach is to pick, at each round, a forecast that corrects the current miscalibration. This is a deterministic rule, and by Oakes' theorem an opponent can defeat it. Randomization alone does not help either: the forecaster must randomize in a way that controls every pairwise regret Ri→jR^{i\to j}Ri→j at once, not only the regret against the best fixed forecast. External no-regret does not imply calibration.

Two further gaps separate Lemma 1 from Theorem 3. First, the Appendix controls a fractional score in which the event "forecast pip^ipi was issued" is replaced by its probability wtiw_t^iwti​. The realized calibration score involves the random choices, so a concentration argument is needed against an adaptive opponent. Second, a fixed grid gives calibration only up to its mesh ε\varepsilonε. Exact convergence requires letting the grid size kkk grow and ε\varepsilonε shrink over time, and the scores of the different phases must be combined.

Formalization scope

  • Model. Strategies are Fin n; forecasts are vectors Fin n → ℝ that are probability vectors (IsDist). Histories are Lean lists of (forecast, play) pairs, oldest first. Forecaster and opponent are maps from histories to Mathlib PMFs. The history law is built with PMF.bind/PMF.map, with the two draws independent given the past. P(Ct<ε)\mathbb P(C_t<\varepsilon)P(Ct​<ε) is the toOuterMeasure of the law, in ℝ≥0∞; no σ-algebra on histories is used.
  • Opponent. The opponent may be randomized and may depend on all past forecasts and plays; fixed sequences and deterministic rules are special cases. The opponent never sees the current forecast. Letting it see the current forecast would make the goal false, and restricting to fixed sequences would make it weaker than the paper.
  • Quantifiers. The forecaster is chosen before the opponent (∃ F, ∀ A). The reverse order is trivial, since one can forecast AAA's next play.
  • Conventions. Rounds are counted from 000, so the paper's rounds 1,…,t1,\dots,t1,…,t are the first ttt list entries. The paper's Rt−1R_{t-1}Rt−1​ is the regret over the 000-based rounds before ttt. Forecasts are grouped by exact equality of real vectors. Sums over ppp run over the forecasts that occur, and every other term vanishes. Scores divide by the history length, and are 000 for the empty history. "Converges in probability" is the lim⁡P(Ct<ε)=1\lim\mathbb P(C_t<\varepsilon)=1limP(Ct​<ε)=1 form the page states. The grid of milestone 3 is indexed 1,…,k1,\dots,k1,…,k (the page writes i=0,…,ki = 0,\dots,ki=0,…,k on p. 53 and 1,…,k1,\dots,k1,…,k in Lemma 1), and "within ε\varepsilonε" is read in squared Euclidean distance.
  • Pinned reading. The page writes the middle term of milestone 3 as E(C2(t))E(C_2(t))E(C2​(t)) with a garbled formula. The mission states the inequality for the fractional score C2,wC_{2,w}C2,w​, for which it holds.
  • Steps the paper leaves informal, not stated as milestones. (a) "E(C2(t))≤ε+O(k/2)E(C_2(t))\le\varepsilon + O(k/\sqrt2)E(C2​(t))≤ε+O(k/2​)" when the weights solve flow conservation; the OOO-term is garbled and should decay in ttt. (b) "if we let kkk grow slowly and ε\varepsilonε go slowly to zero … C2(t)→0C_2(t)\to 0C2​(t)→0 in expectation which implies C2(t)→0C_2(t)\to0C2​(t)→0 in probability by Jensen's inequality", together with the passage from the fractional score to the realized one. Solvers will have to formalize these steps on the way to the goal.
  • Not included. The Corollary on p. 49 (convergence in probability of play to the correlated equilibria when both players use the scheme). It needs the game layer and a quantitative form of Theorem 1, and the page gives no proof.
  • Infrastructure welcome. Finite Markov chain stationary distributions (for milestone 1), for which Prove2Me has MarkovChain.exists_isStationary for row-stochastic matrices. Also useful: martingale concentration for PMF-built processes, and Cauchy–Schwarz with weights. The history-law construction is reusable for any repeated forecasting game.

Selected references

  • D. P. Foster and R. V. Vohra, Calibrated learning and correlated equilibrium, Games and Economic Behavior 21 (1997) 40–55. https://doi.org/10.1006/game.1997.0595
  • D. P. Foster and R. V. Vohra, Asymptotic calibration, Biometrika 85 (1998) 379–390. https://doi.org/10.1093/biomet/85.2.379
  • A. P. Dawid, The well-calibrated Bayesian, J. Amer. Statist. Assoc. 77 (1982) 605–613. https://doi.org/10.1080/01621459.1982.10477856
  • D. Oakes, Self-calibrating priors do not exist, J. Amer. Statist. Assoc. 80 (1985) 339. https://doi.org/10.1080/01621459.1985.10478117
  • S. Hart and A. Mas-Colell, A simple adaptive procedure leading to correlated equilibrium, Econometrica 68 (2000) 1127–1150. https://doi.org/10.1111/1468-0262.00153
10 thms3 active usersReviewed
Algorithmic Game TheoryOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Subjectivity and Correlation in Randomized Strategies I: Subjective Mixed Equilibria of Two-Person Games Have Objective PayoffsResearch Paper

Motivation

Classical non-cooperative game theory randomizes with objective, independent devices: each player spins a private wheel whose odds everyone agrees on. Aumann's 1974 paper (doi:10.1016/0304-4068(74)90037-8) asks what changes when the randomizing events are ordinary events of the world, about which players may hold different subjective probabilities and may be differently informed. The paper introduced correlated equilibrium, and it also separates two effects that the classical model fuses: subjectivity (players disagree about probabilities) and correlation (players peg their choices on common or dependent events).

This mission formalizes the paper's result on subjectivity without correlation. Example 2.3 of the paper exhibits a three-person game in which strategies pegged on subjective but mutually secret events form an equilibrium that every player prefers to every classical mixed equilibrium. Proposition 5.1 shows that this cannot happen with two players.

Setting

A game has a finite set N={1,…,n}N=\{1,\dots,n\}N={1,…,n} of players, a finite set SiS_iSi​ of pure strategies for each player, a finite set XXX of outcomes and an outcome function ggg from S=×i∈NSiS=\times_{i\in N}S_iS=×i∈N​Si​ onto XXX. Player iii has a utility ui:X→Ru_i:X\to\mathbb Rui​:X→R; write hi(a)=ui(g(a))h_i(a)=u_i(g(a))hi​(a)=ui​(g(a)) for a∈Sa\in Sa∈S.

A randomizing structure consists of a set Ω\OmegaΩ of states of the world with a σ\sigmaσ-field B\mathcal BB of events, a sub-σ\sigmaσ-field Ji⊆B\mathcal J_i\subseteq\mathcal BJi​⊆B for each player (the events iii is informed about), and a probability measure pip_ipi​ on B\mathcal BB for each player (the subjective probability of iii). A strategy of iii is a map si:Ω→Sis_i:\Omega\to S_isi​:Ω→Si​ whose level sets {si=a}\{s_i=a\}{si​=a} lie in Ji\mathcal J_iJi​. For a profile s=(s1,…,sn)s=(s_1,\dots,s_n)s=(s1​,…,sn​) of strategies the payoff of iii is

Hi(s)=∫Ωhi(s(ω)) dpi(ω),H_i(s)=\int_\Omega h_i\big(s(\omega)\big)\,dp_i(\omega),Hi​(s)=∫Ω​hi​(s(ω))dpi​(ω),

computed under player iii's own beliefs. An equilibrium point is a profile sss with Hi(s)≥Hi(s1,…,ti,…,sn)H_i(s)\ge H_i(s_1,\dots,t_i,\dots,s_n)Hi​(s)≥Hi​(s1​,…,ti​,…,sn​) for every player iii and every strategy tit_iti​ of iii.

An event AAA is iii-secret if A∈JiA\in\mathcal J_iA∈Ji​ and every other player jjj regards AAA as independent of every event in the σ\sigmaσ-field generated by the Jk\mathcal J_kJk​, k≠ik\ne ik=i: pj(A∩B)=pj(A)pj(B)p_j(A\cap B)=p_j(A)p_j(B)pj​(A∩B)=pj​(A)pj​(B). A strategy is mixed if its level sets are iii-secret, and objective if each level set has the same probability under every pjp_jpj​. A measure is non-atomic on a σ\sigmaσ-field R\mathcal RR if every event of R\mathcal RR of positive measure contains an event of R\mathcal RR of strictly smaller positive measure; a roulette is a sub-σ\sigmaσ-field of B\mathcal BB on which every pjp_jpj​ is non-atomic. Throughout, Assumption II holds: every player iii has a σ\sigmaσ-field Ri\mathcal R_iRi​ of iii-secret events on which every pjp_jpj​ is non-atomic.

For distributions σi\sigma_iσi​ on SiS_iSi​ the classical payoff is Fi(σ)=∑a∈Shi(a)∏jσj(aj)F_i(\sigma)=\sum_{a\in S}h_i(a)\prod_j\sigma_j(a_j)Fi​(σ)=∑a∈S​hi​(a)∏j​σj​(aj​), and σ\sigmaσ is a Nash equilibrium point if no player gains by switching to another distribution.

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 5.1 (p. 78)

Let n=2n=2n=2 and assume

p1(B)=0  ⟺  p2(B)=0for every B∈B.(5.2)p_1(B)=0\iff p_2(B)=0\qquad\text{for every }B\in\mathcal B.\tag{5.2}p1​(B)=0⟺p2​(B)=0for every B∈B.(5.2)

Then for every equilibrium point sss in mixed strategies there is an equilibrium point ttt in objective mixed strategies with

H(s)=H(t).H(s)=H(t).H(s)=H(t).

The game need not be zero-sum.

Milestones

  1. Lemma 7.1 (p. 81): in a roulette R\mathcal RR, for events B1,…,BlB^1,\dots,B^lB1,…,Bl and α∈[0,1]\alpha\in[0,1]α∈[0,1], there is an objective A∈RA\in\mathcal RA∈R with pi(A)=αp_i(A)=\alphapi​(A)=α and pi(A∩Bk)=pi(A)pi(Bk)p_i(A\cap B^k)=p_i(A)p_i(B^k)pi​(A∩Bk)=pi​(A)pi​(Bk) for all i,ki,ki,k.
  2. Lemma 4.1 (p. 77): every distribution σi\sigma_iσi​ on SiS_iSi​ is realised by an objective mixed strategy sis_isi​ with p{si=a}=σi(a)p\{s_i=a\}=\sigma_i(a)p{si​=a}=σi​(a).
  3. Lemma 7.3 (p. 82): if every sjs_jsj​, j≠ij\ne ij=i, is mixed, then pi{s=a}=pi{si=ai} pi{sj=aj ∀j≠i}=∏jpi{sj=aj}p_i\{s=a\}=p_i\{s_i=a_i\}\,p_i\{s_j=a_j\ \forall j\ne i\}=\prod_j p_i\{s_j=a_j\}pi​{s=a}=pi​{si​=ai​}pi​{sj​=aj​ ∀j=i}=∏j​pi​{sj​=aj​}.
  4. Corollary 7.4 (p. 83): mixed strategies are independent under every pkp_kpk​.
  5. Proposition 4.3 (p. 77): {F(σ):σ Nash}={H(s):s an equilibrium point in objective mixed strategies}\{F(\sigma):\sigma\text{ Nash}\}=\{H(s): s\text{ an equilibrium point in objective mixed strategies}\}{F(σ):σ Nash}={H(s):s an equilibrium point in objective mixed strategies}.

Significance

The result. Proposition 5.1 isolates correlation as the source of the new equilibrium payoffs of the subjective model in two-person games: disagreement about probabilities alone, with strategies pegged on secret events, reproduces only payoffs already achievable by classical mixed strategies (by Proposition 4.3, only Nash equilibrium payoffs). The paper uses it to explain Example 2.9, where two zero-sum players both expect more than the value, as an effect of subjectivity combined with correlation. Proposition 4.3 is the bridge that embeds classical Nash theory in the subjective model; with Nash's theorem it gives existence of equilibrium points in every game.

Formalizing it. The results are proved in the paper; to our knowledge none of them has been machine-checked. The mission produces a reusable measure-theoretic model of randomized strategies with private information and subjective beliefs (secret events, mixed and objective strategies, roulettes), a non-atomicity notion relative to a sub-σ\sigmaσ-field, and the Lyapunov-type construction of Lemma 7.1, none of which exists in Mathlib at the pinned revision.

Difficulty

The equilibrium conditions quantify over all strategies of the deviator, i.e. all Ji\mathcal J_iJi​-measurable maps, and the deviator may know events on which the opponent's mixed strategy is pegged. The obvious computation of H1(t1,s2)H_1(t_1,s_2)H1​(t1​,s2​) as a sum of products of marginal probabilities is valid only because the opponent's strategy is pegged on secret events, which is the content of Lemma 7.3; for correlated strategies it fails, and Example 2.9 shows the proposition then fails. A second obstacle is that the replacement t1t_1t1​ must reproduce player 2's beliefs about s1s_1s1​, while player 1's own equilibrium condition is stated under p1p_1p1​; condition (5.2) is what transfers "aaa is played with positive probability" from one player's beliefs to the other's. Constructing objective strategies with prescribed probabilities (Lemmas 7.1 and 4.1) needs the convexity of the range of a non-atomic vector measure (Lyapunov's theorem), which is not in Mathlib.

Formalization scope

Players are a finite type (Fin 2 in the goal, players 1,2↦0,11,2\mapsto 0,11,2↦0,1); the SiS_iSi​ and XXX are finite types, and ggg is surjective. The σ\sigmaσ-field B\mathcal BB is an explicit parameter mΩ of the structure RandomizingStructure ι Ω mΩ, which carries the Ji\mathcal J_iJi​ and the probability measures pip_ipi​. Probabilities are [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞]-valued Mathlib measures. Utilities and pip_ipi​ are data (Assumption I is used only to compare lotteries by expected utility; the uniqueness of pip_ipi​ is not encoded). HiH_iHi​ is a Bochner integral; for strategy profiles the integrand has finitely many values and is measurable, hence integrable. Non-atomicity on a sub-σ\sigmaσ-field is defined directly; Mathlib's NoAtoms (singletons are null) would trivialize Assumption II and is not used. "Mixed" means pegged on the family of all iii-secret events, not on the σ\sigmaσ-field Ri\mathcal R_iRi​ of Assumption II. Classical distributions, FiF_iFi​ and Nash equilibrium points are AGT.IsLottery, AGT.expectedPayoff and AGT.IsMixedNash from the published definition agt_games.

A formalization that restricted deviations to mixed or objective strategies, or dropped "mixed" from the hypothesis on sss, would state a different theorem and is ruled out.

Useful contributions: Lyapunov's convexity theorem for finite-dimensional non-atomic vector measures (or the special case needed for Lemma 7.1), the factorization of Lemma 7.3, and the payoff identities used in the proof of Proposition 4.3. The model definitions are shared in meaning with the companion mission on two-person zero-sum games.

Selected references

  • R. J. Aumann, Subjectivity and Correlation in Randomized Strategies, Journal of Mathematical Economics 1 (1974) 67–96. https://doi.org/10.1016/0304-4068(74)90037-8
  • J. Nash, Non-Cooperative Games, Annals of Mathematics 54 (1951) 286–295. https://doi.org/10.2307/1969529
  • A. Liapounoff, Sur les fonctions-vecteurs complètement additives, Izv. Akad. Nauk SSSR Ser. Mat. 4 (1940) 465–478.
  • L. J. Savage, The Foundations of Statistics, Wiley, 1954.
9 thms3 active usersReviewed
Operations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

On Properties of Stochastic Inventory Systems IV: The (Q, r) Cost Is Flatter in the Order Quantity than the EOQ CostResearch Paper

Motivation

The continuous-review (Q,r)(Q, r)(Q,r) policy is the standard replenishment rule of inventory theory: whenever the inventory position (stock on hand plus on order minus backorders) drops to the reorder point rrr, order a fixed order quantity QQQ. It is used in practice and taught in every operations management course, usually after the deterministic economic order quantity (EOQ) model, which is the same system with a constant demand stream.

Practitioners and textbooks rely on a robustness property of the EOQ: its cost is very insensitive to the choice of order quantity. If the order quantity is off by a factor α\alphaα, the cost rises only by the factor 12(α+1/α)\tfrac12(\alpha + 1/\alpha)21​(α+1/α); ordering 50% too much costs about 8% extra. The insensitivity of the stochastic (Q,r)(Q, r)(Q,r) system to its control parameters had been observed numerically (Wagner, O'Hagan and Lundh 1965; Naddor 1975; Archibald and Silver 1978), but, as Zheng notes, no analytical result on it was known.

Timeline:

  • 1963: Hadley and Whitin derive the (Q,r)(Q, r)(Q,r) cost for Poisson demand.
  • 1986: Zipkin proves that the average backorders of a (Q,r)(Q,r)(Q,r) policy are jointly convex in (Q,r)(Q, r)(Q,r) under continuous demand (Zipkin 1986).
  • 1992: Zheng derives simple optimality conditions for the continuous (Q,r)(Q, r)(Q,r) model and compares it with the EOQ model under the same cost structure. One of the results is that the stochastic cost curve is flatter in the order quantity than the EOQ curve (Zheng 1992). This mission formalizes that result.

Setting

Demands arrive at rate λ>0\lambda>0λ>0; orders arrive after a fixed leadtime L>0L>0L>0; all stockouts are backordered. Each order costs K>0K>0K>0; holding costs accrue at rate h>0h>0h>0 per unit in stock and penalty costs at rate p>0p>0p>0 per unit backordered. The leadtime demand D≥0D\ge 0D≥0 has distribution μ\muμ with finite mean E(D)=λLE(D) = \lambda LE(D)=λL.

The inventory cost rate at inventory position yyy is

G(y)=E[h(y−D)++p(D−y)+],G(y) = E\big[h(y-D)^+ + p(D-y)^+\big],G(y)=E[h(y−D)++p(D−y)+],

assumed to attain its minimum at a unique point y0y^0y0. The long-run average cost of the policy (Q,r)(Q, r)(Q,r) is

c(Q,r)=λK+∫rr+QG(y) dyQ,Q>0.c(Q, r) = \frac{\lambda K + \int_r^{r+Q} G(y)\,dy}{Q}, \qquad Q>0.c(Q,r)=QλK+∫rr+Q​G(y)dy​,Q>0.

For fixed Q>0Q>0Q>0 let r(Q)r(Q)r(Q) be a reorder point minimizing c(Q,⋅)c(Q,\cdot)c(Q,⋅), and let

C(Q)=c(Q,r(Q)),H(Q)=G(r(Q)) (Q>0),H(0)=G(y0).C(Q) = c(Q, r(Q)), \qquad H(Q) = G(r(Q))\ (Q>0), \quad H(0) = G(y^0).C(Q)=c(Q,r(Q)),H(Q)=G(r(Q)) (Q>0),H(0)=G(y0).

CCC is the cost of the order quantity QQQ when the reorder point is always chosen optimally for it. An optimal order quantity Q∗Q^*Q∗ minimizes CCC over Q>0Q>0Q>0, and C∗=C(Q∗)C^* = C(Q^*)C∗=C(Q∗).

The EOQ model is the same system with the constant leadtime demand λL\lambda LλL. Its cost rate is Gd(y)=h(y−λL)++p(λL−y)+G_d(y) = h(y-\lambda L)^+ + p(\lambda L-y)^+Gd​(y)=h(y−λL)++p(λL−y)+, and rdr_drd​, HdH_dHd​, CdC_dCd​ are the objects above at GdG_dGd​, with optimum Qd∗Q^*_dQd∗​ and Cd∗C^*_dCd∗​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 4

C(αQ∗)C∗≤12(α+1α)∀α>0.\frac{C(\alpha Q^*)}{C^*} \le \frac12\left(\alpha + \frac1\alpha\right) \qquad \forall \alpha>0.C∗C(αQ∗)​≤21​(α+α1​)∀α>0.

The goal holds for every demand distribution satisfying the standing assumptions and every optimal Q∗Q^*Q∗. Both regimes, α<1\alpha<1α<1 and α>1\alpha>1α>1, are included.

Milestones

In the order the proof uses them:

  1. Eq. (7): ∫r(Q)r(Q)+QG=∫0QH\int_{r(Q)}^{r(Q)+Q} G = \int_0^Q H∫r(Q)r(Q)+Q​G=∫0Q​H, hence C(Q)=(λK+∫0QH(y)dy)/QC(Q) = \big(\lambda K + \int_0^Q H(y)dy\big)/QC(Q)=(λK+∫0Q​H(y)dy)/Q for Q>0Q>0Q>0.
  2. Lemma 4: HHH is increasing and convex on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞) with asymptotic slope hp/(h+p)hp/(h+p)hp/(h+p).
  3. Eq. (8): an optimal Q∗Q^*Q∗ exists, and Q>0Q>0Q>0 is optimal iff H(Q)=C(Q)H(Q) = C(Q)H(Q)=C(Q).
  4. Eq. (18): Hd(Q)=hph+pQH_d(Q) = \frac{hp}{h+p}QHd​(Q)=h+php​Q, with rd(Q)=λL−hh+pQr_d(Q) = \lambda L - \frac{h}{h+p}Qrd​(Q)=λL−h+ph​Q.
  5. Lemma 7: H0(Q)≤Hd(Q)≤H(Q)H_0(Q) \le H_d(Q) \le H(Q)H0​(Q)≤Hd​(Q)≤H(Q) and A(Q)≤Ad(Q)A(Q)\le A_d(Q)A(Q)≤Ad​(Q), where H0=H−G(y0)H_0 = H - G(y^0)H0​=H−G(y0) and A(Q)=QH(Q)−∫0QHA(Q) = QH(Q) - \int_0^Q HA(Q)=QH(Q)−∫0Q​H.
  6. Eqs. (26)–(27): H(αQ)≤αH(Q)H(\alpha Q)\le \alpha H(Q)H(αQ)≤αH(Q) for α>1\alpha>1α>1 and H(αQ)≥αH(Q)H(\alpha Q)\ge\alpha H(Q)H(αQ)≥αH(Q) for 0<α<10<\alpha<10<α<1.
  7. Lemma 9: ∫QαQH(y) dy≤α2−12 QH(Q)\int_Q^{\alpha Q} H(y)\,dy \le \frac{\alpha^2-1}{2}\,Q H(Q)∫QαQ​H(y)dy≤2α2−1​QH(Q) for all α>0\alpha>0α>0, Q>0Q>0Q>0.

Significance

In the EOQ model the relative cost of a scaled order quantity is exactly Cd(αQd∗)/Cd∗=12(α+1/α)C_d(\alpha Q^*_d)/C^*_d = \tfrac12(\alpha + 1/\alpha)Cd​(αQd∗​)/Cd∗​=21​(α+1/α) (Eq. (25) of the paper). Theorem 4 shows that the stochastic system is at least as forgiving. The bound holds for every leadtime-demand distribution with a unique newsvendor minimizer, and it does not depend on the parameters KKK, hhh, ppp, λ\lambdaλ or LLL. Because the reorder point is re-optimized for each quantity, the bound applies to the practical question of how much a misestimated lot size costs when the safety stock is set correctly.

Together with the other results of the paper (the 1/81/81/8 bound for the EOQ heuristic and the bounds between Q∗Q^*Q∗ and Qd∗Q^*_dQd∗​, which are separate missions of this series), it gives a closed-form account of why the EOQ is a good heuristic for stochastic systems.

The result has a complete published proof. It has not been machine-checked. The work that remains is a formal proof for general distributions: the paper differentiates GGG and r(Q)r(Q)r(Q) twice, and a formal proof has to replace those derivatives with arguments that need no density.

Difficulty

C(Q)C(Q)C(Q) is defined through an inner minimization over the reorder point, so its shape in QQQ is controlled by the implicitly defined function H(Q)=G(r(Q))H(Q) = G(r(Q))H(Q)=G(r(Q)) rather than by GGG directly. The obvious approach would bound C(αQ∗)C(\alpha Q^*)C(αQ∗) with the reorder point fixed at r(Q∗)r(Q^*)r(Q∗). That approach is the wrong comparison: it bounds a larger quantity, and the resulting bound depends on the distribution.

The paper's proof uses three properties of HHH: that it is convex, that its slope never exceeds the EOQ slope hp/(h+p)hp/(h+p)hp/(h+p), and that it dominates HdH_dHd​. The paper obtains these from the derivatives r′(Q)r'(Q)r′(Q) and H′(Q)H'(Q)H′(Q) under a smooth demand distribution. Without a density, r(Q)r(Q)r(Q) is only an argmin and HHH need not be differentiable, so none of these three properties can be read off a derivative formula; the asymptotic slope in particular depends on the finite mean E(D)=λLE(D) = \lambda LE(D)=λL and on the behaviour of GGG at ±∞\pm\infty±∞.

Formalization scope

The mission is set in Lean 4 with Mathlib. All objects are real valued.

  • Model. The structure QRModel bundles λ,L,K,h,p>0\lambda, L, K, h, p>0λ,L,K,h,p>0, a probability measure μ\muμ on R\mathbb{R}R with integrable identity, ∫x dμ=λL\int x\,d\mu = \lambda L∫xdμ=λL, D≥0D\ge 0D≥0 almost surely, and the unique-minimizer hypothesis on GGG. K>0K>0K>0 is implicit in the paper and made explicit here. No density is assumed; deterministic and discrete demands are allowed, and the paper's own numerical study uses Poisson demand.
  • Generic machinery. ccc, r(Q)r(Q)r(Q), y0y^0y0, HHH, H0H_0H0​, CCC and AAA are defined for an arbitrary cost rate and instantiated at GGG and at GdG_dGd​. r(Q)r(Q)r(Q) and y0y^0y0 are chosen minimizers; they are never defined by the equation G(r)=G(r+Q)G(r) = G(r+Q)G(r)=G(r+Q), which is a lemma of the paper. H(0)=G(y0)H(0) = G(y^0)H(0)=G(y0). Values at Q<0Q<0Q<0 (and of ccc, CCC at Q≤0Q\le 0Q≤0) are junk, and every statement restricts to Q>0Q>0Q>0 or Q≥0Q\ge 0Q≥0.
  • Readings of informal words. "Increasing" in Lemma 4 is strict on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞), since the proof shows H′>0H'>0H′>0. "Asymptotic slope hp/(h+p)hp/(h+p)hp/(h+p)" is stated as H(Q)/Q→hp/(h+p)H(Q)/Q\to hp/(h+p)H(Q)/Q→hp/(h+p) together with the chord bound H(Q2)−H(Q1)≤hph+p(Q2−Q1)H(Q_2)-H(Q_1)\le \frac{hp}{h+p}(Q_2-Q_1)H(Q2​)−H(Q1​)≤h+php​(Q2​−Q1​) for 0≤Q1≤Q20\le Q_1\le Q_20≤Q1​≤Q2​. The chord bound is the derivative-free form of H′≤hp/(h+p)H'\le hp/(h+p)H′≤hp/(h+p) that the proofs of Lemmas 7–9 use. "The optimal order quantity" is IsOptQty Q, meaning Q>0Q>0Q>0 and C(Q)≤C(Q′)C(Q)\le C(Q')C(Q)≤C(Q′) for all Q′>0Q'>0Q′>0. Its existence is asserted in the Eq. (8) milestone, so the goal is not vacuous. "∀α>0\forall\alpha>0∀α>0" is a real α>0\alpha>0α>0 with real division 1/α1/\alpha1/α. In Lemma 9 the integral ∫QαQ\int_Q^{\alpha Q}∫QαQ​ is oriented, as on the page.
  • Ruling out trivializations. C(αQ∗)C(\alpha Q^*)C(αQ∗) re-optimizes the reorder point for αQ∗\alpha Q^*αQ∗; holding it at r(Q∗)r(Q^*)r(Q∗) would be a different theorem. C∗>0C^*>0C∗>0 is a consequence of the model, not a hypothesis.

A complete development needs the following:

  • integrability and continuity of GGG;
  • existence of the optimal reorder point;
  • convexity of HHH;
  • the asymptotics G−Gd→0G - G_d\to 0G−Gd​→0 at ±∞\pm\infty±∞;
  • Jensen's inequality Gd≤GG_d\le GGd​≤G (Eq. (22));
  • existence of Q∗Q^*Q∗.

These facts about newsvendor cost functions are reusable in the other missions of this series. Contributions of any of them as separate lemmas are welcome.

Selected references

  • Y.-S. Zheng, On Properties of Stochastic Inventory Systems, Management Science 38(1):87–103, 1992. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.38.1.87
  • P. H. Zipkin, Inventory Service-Level Measures: Convexity and Approximation, Management Science 32(8):975–981, 1986. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.32.8.975
  • G. Hadley and T. M. Whitin, Analysis of Inventory Systems, Prentice-Hall, 1963.
  • H. M. Wagner, M. O'Hagan and B. Lundh, An Empirical Study of Exactly and Approximately Optimal Inventory Policies, Management Science 11(7):690–723, 1965. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.11.7.690
  • A. Federgruen and Y.-S. Zheng, An Efficient Algorithm for Computing an Optimal (r, Q) Policy in Continuous Review Stochastic Inventory Systems, Operations Research 40(4):808–813, 1992. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.40.4.808
11 thms3 active usersReviewed
Operations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

On Properties of Stochastic Inventory Systems II: The Optimal Order Quantity of the Stochastic (Q, r) Model Exceeds the EOQ by a Bounded GapResearch Paper

Motivation

The continuous-review (Q,r)(Q, r)(Q,r) policy is the standard control rule for a single stocked item with random demand: whenever the inventory position falls to the reorder point rrr, an order of fixed size QQQ is placed. It is implemented in a large share of commercial inventory systems. Choosing the two parameters jointly has traditionally required numerical search (Hadley and Whitin, 1963; Federgruen and Zheng, 1992). In practice the order quantity is therefore often taken from the deterministic economic order quantity (EOQ) formula with backorders, and the reorder point is then set for the random demand.

Zheng (1992) turned this practice into a question with an exact answer: how does the optimal order quantity Q∗Q^*Q∗ of the stochastic model compare with the EOQ quantity Qd∗Q^*_dQd∗​ computed from the same cost data and the same mean demand? Its Theorem 2 answers it with a two-sided bound. This mission formalizes that theorem. Companion missions of the same series formalize the paper's cost bounds (Theorem 3), the flatness of the cost curve (Theorem 4) and the 1/81/81/8 bound on the cost of using the EOQ quantity (Theorem 5).

Setting

Demand arrives at rate λ>0\lambda > 0λ>0 and replenishment orders arrive after a fixed leadtime L>0L > 0L>0. Shortages are backordered. Holding costs accrue at rate h>0h > 0h>0 per unit held, backorder penalties at rate p>0p > 0p>0 per unit short, and every order costs K>0K > 0K>0. The leadtime demand DDD is a nonnegative random variable with law μ\muμ and mean E(D)=λL\mathbb{E}(D) = \lambda LE(D)=λL. The expected inventory cost rate at inventory position yyy is the newsvendor cost

G(y)=E[h(y−D)++p(D−y)+],G(y) = \mathbb{E}\big[h(y - D)^+ + p(D - y)^+\big],G(y)=E[h(y−D)++p(D−y)+],

assumed, as in the paper, to attain its minimum at a unique point y0y^0y0. The long-run average cost of the policy (Q,r)(Q, r)(Q,r) is

c(Q,r)=λK+∫rr+QG(y) dyQ.c(Q, r) = \frac{\lambda K + \int_r^{r+Q} G(y)\,dy}{Q}.c(Q,r)=QλK+∫rr+Q​G(y)dy​.

For each Q>0Q > 0Q>0, let r(Q)r(Q)r(Q) be an optimal reorder point, i.e. a minimizer of c(Q,⋅)c(Q, \cdot)c(Q,⋅). The analysis runs through the curves

H(Q)=G(r(Q)) (Q>0),H(0)=G(y0),H0(Q)=H(Q)−G(y0),A(Q)=QH(Q)−∫0QH(y) dy,H(Q) = G(r(Q))\ (Q > 0),\quad H(0) = G(y^0),\qquad H_0(Q) = H(Q) - G(y^0),\qquad A(Q) = QH(Q) - \int_0^Q H(y)\,dy,H(Q)=G(r(Q)) (Q>0),H(0)=G(y0),H0​(Q)=H(Q)−G(y0),A(Q)=QH(Q)−∫0Q​H(y)dy,

and through the cost C(Q)=c(Q,r(Q))C(Q) = c(Q, r(Q))C(Q)=c(Q,r(Q)) of order quantity QQQ with the reorder point set optimally. The optimal order quantity Q∗Q^*Q∗ is the minimizer of CCC over Q>0Q > 0Q>0.

The EOQ model is the case of a constant leadtime demand λL\lambda LλL. Its cost rate is Gd(y)=h(y−λL)++p(λL−y)+G_d(y) = h(y - \lambda L)^+ + p(\lambda L - y)^+Gd​(y)=h(y−λL)++p(λL−y)+, and the same construction gives rdr_drd​, HdH_dHd​, AdA_dAd​ and the optimal quantity

Qd∗=2λK(h+p)hp.Q^*_d = \sqrt{\frac{2\lambda K(h+p)}{hp}}.Qd∗​=hp2λK(h+p)​​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2 (p. 96)

For K>0K > 0K>0, let Qˉ\bar QQˉ​, Qˉ1\bar Q_1Qˉ​1​, Qˉ2\bar Q_2Qˉ​2​ be the positive solutions of

QH0(Q)=2λK,H0(Q)=Hd(Qd∗),∫0QH0(y) dy=λK.Q H_0(Q) = 2\lambda K,\qquad H_0(Q) = H_d(Q^*_d),\qquad \int_0^Q H_0(y)\,dy = \lambda K.QH0​(Q)=2λK,H0​(Q)=Hd​(Qd∗​),∫0Q​H0​(y)dy=λK.

Each has exactly one positive solution, and

Qd∗≤Q∗≤Qˉ,Qˉ≤Qˉ1,Qˉ≤Qˉ2.Q^*_d \le Q^* \le \bar Q,\qquad \bar Q \le \bar Q_1,\qquad \bar Q \le \bar Q_2.Qd∗​≤Q∗≤Qˉ​,Qˉ​≤Qˉ​1​,Qˉ​≤Qˉ​2​.

Moreover, with λ,L,h,p\lambda, L, h, pλ,L,h,p and the demand law fixed, K↦Qˉ1(K)−Qd∗(K)K \mapsto \bar Q_1(K) - Q^*_d(K)K↦Qˉ​1​(K)−Qd∗​(K) is nondecreasing on (0,∞)(0, \infty)(0,∞) and converges to a finite constant as K→∞K \to \inftyK→∞.

Milestones

The milestones are the paper's own numbered results that feed Theorem 2, listed in the order the argument uses them:

  1. Lemma 2 (p. 90): for Q>0Q > 0Q>0, rrr is optimal iff G(r)=G(r+Q)G(r) = G(r + Q)G(r)=G(r+Q).
  2. Eq. (7) (p. 91): C(Q)=(λK+∫0QH(y) dy)/QC(Q) = (\lambda K + \int_0^Q H(y)\,dy)/QC(Q)=(λK+∫0Q​H(y)dy)/Q.
  3. Lemma 4 (p. 91): HHH is increasing and convex with asymptotic slope hp/(h+p)hp/(h+p)hp/(h+p).
  4. Lemma 6 (p. 92): AAA is increasing and convex, and Q=Q∗Q = Q^*Q=Q∗ iff A(Q)=λKA(Q) = \lambda KA(Q)=λK.
  5. Eqs. (18), (20) (p. 94): Hd(Q)=hph+pQH_d(Q) = \frac{hp}{h+p}QHd​(Q)=h+php​Q, and Qd∗Q^*_dQd∗​ is optimal for the EOQ model.
  6. Lemma 7 (p. 95): H0≤Hd≤HH_0 \le H_d \le HH0​≤Hd​≤H and A≤AdA \le A_dA≤Ad​.
  7. Lemma 8 (p. 95): ∫0QH≥12QH(Q)≥A(Q)≥12QH0(Q)≥∫0QH0\int_0^Q H \ge \tfrac12 QH(Q) \ge A(Q) \ge \tfrac12 QH_0(Q) \ge \int_0^Q H_0∫0Q​H≥21​QH(Q)≥A(Q)≥21​QH0​(Q)≥∫0Q​H0​, with equalities for deterministic demand.

Significance

The result. Theorem 2 says that the EOQ formula always underestimates the optimal order quantity when leadtime demand is random. The underestimate is bounded by Qˉ1−Qd∗\bar Q_1 - Q^*_dQˉ​1​−Qd∗​, a quantity that stays bounded however large the ordering cost is. So the relative error of the EOQ quantity vanishes as KKK grows. The first inequality, Qd∗≤Q∗Q^*_d \le Q^*Qd∗​≤Q∗, is also an ingredient of the paper's Theorem 3 (cost bounds) and Theorem 5 (the EOQ quantity raises costs by at most 1/81/81/8). The explicit bounds Qˉ\bar QQˉ​, Qˉ1\bar Q_1Qˉ​1​, Qˉ2\bar Q_2Qˉ​2​ bracket Q∗Q^*Q∗ and give a search interval for it.

Formalizing it. The theorem has been proved on paper since 1992. No machine-checked version of it, or of the continuous-review (Q,r)(Q, r)(Q,r) cost of Eq. (1), exists on this platform. The inventory items already here treat the discrete cost with integer order quantities, a normally distributed demand, or the EOQ without backorders. This mission provides a machine-checked version of the paper's optimality conditions for a general demand distribution. The paper's argument differentiates GGG twice, i.e. it tacitly assumes a density. The formal statements do not, so a formal proof must redo those steps with one-sided (convexity) arguments. The printed argument for the limit in part (b) shows only that a derivative tends to zero. A complete proof of convergence is part of the work.

Difficulty

The obvious route to Qd∗≤Q∗Q^*_d \le Q^*Qd∗​≤Q∗ compares the two cost curves CCC and CdC_dCd​ directly. It fails because C≥CdC \ge C_dC≥Cd​ pointwise, and a pointwise inequality between two convex functions says nothing about the order of their minimizers. The stochastic curve HHH is defined only implicitly, as GGG evaluated at a minimizer of a parametric integral, so its growth relative to the linear HdH_dHd​ has to be established before any comparison of order quantities. For part (b), a vanishing derivative does not imply convergence (log⁡K\log KlogK also has a vanishing derivative), so the printed proof of the limit does not go through as written.

Without a density, r(Q)r(Q)r(Q) need not be differentiable. Every derivative in the paper's proofs (of rrr, HHH and AAA) must be replaced by monotonicity or chord arguments.

Formalization scope

The Lean development uses the namespace ZhengQR.OrderQty. Its conventions:

  • Parameters. λ,L,K,h,p\lambda, L, K, h, pλ,L,K,h,p are reals, all assumed strictly positive. K>0K > 0K>0 is implicit in the paper; at K=0K = 0K=0 the optimal quantity degenerates.
  • Demand. The law μ\muμ of DDD is a probability measure on R\mathbb{R}R that is integrable, has mean λL\lambda LλL and is carried by [0,∞)[0, \infty)[0,∞). No density is assumed, so discrete laws such as the Poisson of the paper's §4 are allowed.
  • Standing assumption. GGG has a unique global minimizer (p. 90). It is a hypothesis of every statement about the stochastic model.
  • Generic machinery. ccc, r(Q)r(Q)r(Q), y0y^0y0, HHH, CCC, AAA, H0H_0H0​ and optimality of QQQ are defined for an arbitrary cost rate GGG and applied to both the newsvendor cost and GdG_dGd​. So Eqs. (18) and (20) are theorems, not definitions. r(Q)r(Q)r(Q) and y0y^0y0 are chosen minimizers, never solutions of Lemma 2's equation. r(Q)r(Q)r(Q) minimizes ∫rr+QG\int_r^{r+Q}G∫rr+Q​G, which for Q>0Q > 0Q>0 has the same minimizers as c(Q,⋅)c(Q, \cdot)c(Q,⋅), so HHH, H0H_0H0​ and AAA do not depend on KKK.
  • Domains. HHH, H0H_0H0​ and AAA are used on [0,∞)[0, \infty)[0,∞), ccc and CCC for Q>0Q > 0Q>0 only, and Q∗Q^*Q∗ is a Q>0Q > 0Q>0 minimizing CCC over (0,∞)(0, \infty)(0,∞).
  • Readings of informal words.
    • Lemma 4's "increasing" and Lemma 6's "increasing/decreasing" mean strictly.
    • Lemma 4's "asymptotic slope hp/(h+p)hp/(h+p)hp/(h+p)" means H(Q)/Q→hp/(h+p)H(Q)/Q \to hp/(h+p)H(Q)/Q→hp/(h+p) together with the chord bound H(Q′)−H(Q)≤hph+p(Q′−Q)H(Q') - H(Q) \le \frac{hp}{h+p}(Q' - Q)H(Q′)−H(Q)≤h+php​(Q′−Q) for 0≤Q<Q′0 \le Q < Q'0≤Q<Q′.
    • "Qˉ=def{Q:… }\bar Q \overset{\text{def}}{=} \{Q : \dots\}Qˉ​=def{Q:…}" means the unique positive solution. The goal quantifies over every positive solution and separately asserts that exactly one exists.
    • Theorem 2's "increasing function of KKK" means nondecreasing, which is what the paper's proof establishes (a nonnegative derivative).
    • "Converges to a constant" means a finite real limit.
    • Lemma 8's "the leadtime demand is deterministic" means the EOQ model with cost rate GdG_dGd​.
  • Ruling out trivial readings. The goal's hypotheses are satisfiable (for example by a deterministic leadtime demand). Existence of Q∗Q^*Q∗ (Lemma 6) and of Qˉ\bar QQˉ​, Qˉ1\bar Q_1Qˉ​1​, Qˉ2\bar Q_2Qˉ​2​ (the goal itself) is asserted, so neither the bounds nor the limit hold vacuously.

Infrastructure needed includes the following. Much of it is reusable for any single-item inventory model:

  • differentiation under the expectation, or one-sided substitutes, for GGG;
  • convexity of HHH as the inverse of the width of the sublevel sets of GGG;
  • the envelope identity behind Eq. (7);
  • elementary convex-analysis facts about chords.

Contributions welcome: proofs of the milestones in any order, general lemmas on the newsvendor cost, and a complete convergence argument for part (b).

Selected references

  • Y.-S. Zheng, On Properties of Stochastic Inventory Systems, Management Science 38(1):87–103, 1992. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.38.1.87
  • A. Federgruen, Y.-S. Zheng, An Efficient Algorithm for Computing an Optimal (r, Q) Policy in Continuous Review Stochastic Inventory Systems, Operations Research 40(4):808–813, 1992. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.40.4.808
10 thms3 active usersReviewed
Dynamic ProgrammingOperations ResearchStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Asymptotic Optimality of Tailored Base-Surge Policies in Dual-Sourcing Inventory Systems: Asymptotic Optimality of the Best TBS Policy for Long Lead TimesResearch Paper

Motivation

Firms that can buy the same item from two suppliers, a cheap slow one and a fast expensive one, face the dual-sourcing inventory problem: how much to order from each source in every period when demand is random and unmet demand is backlogged. Global sourcing (offshore regular supply plus a near-shore express supply) is the standard example (Allon and Van Mieghem 2010). When the two lead times differ by more than one period, the optimal policy depends on the whole pipeline of outstanding orders. No simple optimal policy is known, and dynamic programming is intractable for long lead times.

The tailored base-surge (TBS) policy orders a constant amount from the slow source and uses the fast source to bring the expedited inventory position up to a fixed level. It is simple, and it is used in practice. Janakiraman, Seshadri and Sheopuri (JSS, Management Science 2015) showed that its best parameters solve a convex program that does not depend on the regular lead time, and they conjectured, with numerical support, that TBS is near-optimal when that lead time is long.

Timeline:

  • Karlin and Scarf (1958), Scarf (1960): structure of optimal single-source backlog policies with a lead time.
  • Sheopuri, Janakiraman and Seshadri (2010): reduction of dual-sourcing policies to the truncated regular pipeline and the expedited inventory position (Lemma 1 here).
  • Allon and Van Mieghem (2010): the TBS policy, with conjectures and numerical evidence.
  • JSS (2015): the TBS cost formula and a convex program for its parameters.
  • Xin and Goldberg (2018): proof of the conjecture with an explicit rate (Management Science 64(1), 2018). This mission formalizes that result.

Setting

Let DDD be a nonnegative random variable with finite mean E[D]\mathbb E[D]E[D] that is not almost surely constant. Demands D1,D2,…D_1, D_2, \dotsD1​,D2​,… are i.i.d. copies of DDD. The regular source has lead time LLL, the express source has lead time L0≥0L_0 \ge 0L0​≥0, and L>L0+1L > L_0 + 1L>L0​+1. In period ttt the controller orders qtR≥0q^R_t \ge 0qtR​≥0 and qtE≥0q^E_t \ge 0qtE​≥0; then qt−LR+qt−L0Eq^R_{t-L} + q^E_{t-L_0}qt−LR​+qt−L0​E​ arrives and DtD_tDt​ is realized, so the on-hand inventory evolves as It+1=It+qt−LR+qt−L0E−DtI_{t+1} = I_t + q^R_{t-L} + q^E_{t-L_0} - D_tIt+1​=It​+qt−LR​+qt−L0​E​−Dt​ and may be negative. Initially nothing is on order and I1=−∑i=1G^D−i′I_1 = -\sum_{i=1}^{\hat G} D'_{-i}I1​=−∑i=1G^​D−i′​, where the D−i′D'_{-i}D−i′​ are further i.i.d. copies of DDD and P(G^=k)=2−k\mathbb P(\hat G = k) = 2^{-k}P(G^=k)=2−k, k≥1k \ge 1k≥1.

The per-period cost is c qt−L0E+G(It+1)c\,q^E_{t-L_0} + G(I_{t+1})cqt−L0​E​+G(It+1​) with G(y)=hy++by−G(y) = h y^+ + b y^-G(y)=hy++by−, where b,h>0b, h > 0b,h>0 and c>0c > 0c>0 is the express premium (the regular unit cost is normalized to 000). An admissible policy π∈Π\pi \in \Piπ∈Π chooses the two orders in period ttt as deterministic measurable functions of (qt−LR,…,qt−1R,qt−L0E,…,qt−1E,It)(q^R_{t-L}, \dots, q^R_{t-1}, q^E_{t-L_0}, \dots, q^E_{t-1}, I_t)(qt−LR​,…,qt−1R​,qt−L0​E​,…,qt−1E​,It​). Its long-run average cost is

C(π)=lim sup⁡T→∞1T∑t=L0+1TE[Ctπ],OPT(L)=inf⁡π∈ΠC(π).C(\pi) = \limsup_{T\to\infty}\frac1T\sum_{t=L_0+1}^T \mathbb E[C^\pi_t], \qquad \mathrm{OPT}(L) = \inf_{\pi\in\Pi}C(\pi).C(π)=T→∞limsup​T1​t=L0​+1∑T​E[Ctπ​],OPT(L)=π∈Πinf​C(π).

With the expedited inventory position I^t=It+∑k=t−L0t−1qkE+∑k=t−Lt−L+L0qkR\hat I_t = I_t + \sum_{k=t-L_0}^{t-1}q^E_k + \sum_{k=t-L}^{t-L+L_0}q^R_kI^t​=It​+∑k=t−L0​t−1​qkE​+∑k=t−Lt−L+L0​​qkR​, the TBS policy πr,S\pi_{r,S}πr,S​ orders qtR=rq^R_t = rqtR​=r and qtE=max⁡(0,S−I^t)q^E_t = \max(0, S - \hat I_t)qtE​=max(0,S−I^t​). A best TBS pair (r∗,S∗)(r^*, S^*)(r∗,S∗) minimizes C(πr,S)C(\pi_{r,S})C(πr,S​) over 0≤r≤E[D]0 \le r \le \mathbb E[D]0≤r≤E[D] and S∈RS \in \mathbb RS∈R (first in rrr through F∞(r)=inf⁡SC(πr,S)F^\infty(r) = \inf_S C(\pi_{r,S})F∞(r)=infS​C(πr,S​), then in SSS).

The constants ϵ0\epsilon_0ϵ0​ and Y0Y_0Y0​ are explicit functionals of the law of DDD and of L0,b,h,cL_0, b, h, cL0​,b,h,c. They are built from g=inf⁡xE[G(x−∑i=1L0+1Di′)]g = \inf_x\mathbb E[G(x - \sum_{i=1}^{L_0+1}D'_i)]g=infx​E[G(x−∑i=1L0​+1​Di′​)], U=c E[D]+E[G(−∑i=1L0+1Di′)]U = c\,\mathbb E[D] + \mathbb E[G(-\sum_{i=1}^{L_0+1}D'_i)]U=cE[D]+E[G(−∑i=1L0​+1​Di′​)], p0=P(D<E[D])p_0 = \mathbb P(D < \mathbb E[D])p0​=P(D<E[D]), the mean absolute deviation η0\eta_0η0​, and the large-deviation quantities γϵ,ϑϵ\gamma_\epsilon, \vartheta_\epsilonγϵ​,ϑϵ​ of ϕϵ(θ)=eθ(E[D]−ϵ)E[e−θD]\phi_\epsilon(\theta) = e^{\theta(\mathbb E[D]-\epsilon)}\mathbb E[e^{-\theta D}]ϕϵ​(θ)=eθ(E[D]−ϵ)E[e−θD] (p. 441).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1 (p. 441)

For all L0≥0L_0 \ge 0L0​≥0, ϵ∈(0,1)\epsilon \in (0,1)ϵ∈(0,1) and L>ϵ0−2+Y0ϵ−2L > \epsilon_0^{-2} + Y_0\epsilon^{-2}L>ϵ0−2​+Y0​ϵ−2,

C(πr∗,S∗)OPT(L)<1+ϵ.\frac{C(\pi_{r^*,S^*})}{\mathrm{OPT}(L)} < 1 + \epsilon.OPT(L)C(πr∗,S∗​)​<1+ϵ.

The threshold does not depend on LLL, so the statement gives an explicit, inverse-polynomial rate. Its limit form C(πr∗,S∗)/OPT(L)→1C(\pi_{r^*,S^*})/\mathrm{OPT}(L) \to 1C(πr∗,S∗​)/OPT(L)→1 is Corollary 1 of the paper.

Milestones

In the order the proof uses them:

  • the bound g≤OPT(L)≤Ug \le \mathrm{OPT}(L) \le Ug≤OPT(L)≤U;
  • Lemma 1, the reduction to Π^\hat\PiΠ^ (quoted from Sheopuri et al.);
  • Eq. (3), the TBS cost formula C(πr,S)=c(E[D]−r)+E[G(I∞r+S−∑i=1L0+1Di′)]C(\pi_{r,S}) = c(\mathbb E[D]-r) + \mathbb E[G(I^r_\infty + S - \sum_{i=1}^{L_0+1}D'_i)]C(πr,S​)=c(E[D]−r)+E[G(I∞r​+S−∑i=1L0​+1​Di′​)] (quoted from JSS);
  • Theorem 2, the existence of a stationary-like vector (χ∗,L,q∗,L,I∗,L)(\chi^{*,L}, q^{*,L}, \mathcal I^{*,L})(χ∗,L,q∗,L,I∗,L) with rL=E[χ1∗,L]r_L = \mathbb E[\chi^{*,L}_1]rL​=E[χ1∗,L​];
  • Corollary 2 and Lemma 2, the lower bound OPT(L)≥c(E[D]−rL)+(1−α)VαL−L0(rL,−∞)\mathrm{OPT}(L) \ge c(\mathbb E[D]-r_L) + (1-\alpha)V^{L-L_0}_\alpha(r_L,-\infty)OPT(L)≥c(E[D]−rL​)+(1−α)VαL−L0​​(rL​,−∞) through a discounted single-source problem;
  • Lemma 3, the Bellman equation and structure of that problem (quoted from JSS and Scarf 1960);
  • Lemma 4 (8) and (9), and Corollary 3, the passage to the infinite horizon and to base-stock policies;
  • Lemma 5, the random-walk maxima MkrM^r_kMkr​ (proof omitted in the paper);
  • Lemmas 8–9 and Corollary 4: rL<E[D]−ϵ0r_L < \mathbb E[D] - \epsilon_0rL​<E[D]−ϵ0​ once L>ϵ0−2+L0+1L > \epsilon_0^{-2} + L_0 + 1L>ϵ0−2​+L0​+1.

Significance

The theorem shows that one of the simplest dual-sourcing heuristics is asymptotically optimal as the regular lead time grows. This is the regime where exact dynamic programming is hopeless. The best TBS parameters come from a convex program independent of LLL, so the result yields an algorithm whose running time does not grow with LLL and whose optimality gap is bounded explicitly for every finite LLL. It extends the lower-bounding technique of Xin and Goldberg's lost-sales work (Operations Research 2016) from a static to a dynamic relaxation.

Formalization adds the following. To the best of available knowledge, none of the objects involved (average-cost inventory control with backlog, TBS policies, Lindley-type maxima of random walks with their Spitzer identity) exists in Mathlib or on the platform. The paper's proof defers several ingredients to the literature or omits them: Lemma 1, Eq. (3), Lemma 3, and the details of Lemmas 5 and 7. A complete formal proof must supply them. The result is proved on paper but not formalized anywhere.

Difficulty

An optimal dual-sourcing policy need not be stationary, its induced Markov chain need not have a stationary distribution, and the inventory is unbounded below. The natural argument would compare the optimal policy's steady state with the TBS steady state, and it fails at its first step. Theorem 2 replaces the steady state by a vector with a few distributional properties, built from time averages. That construction, and the independence structure it must carry, is the central technical step. The conditional Jensen step then leads to a single-source problem with possibly negative demand, where textbook interchange-of-limits theorems do not apply directly. Finally, bounding rLr_LrL​ away from E[D]\mathbb E[D]E[D] requires a quantitative lower bound on the growth of random-walk maxima under only a first-moment assumption.

Formalization scope

Conventions of the Lean development (namespace XinGoldbergTBS.Asymptotic):

  • The law of DDD is a probability measure on R\mathbb RR with no mass on (−∞,0)(-\infty,0)(−∞,0), finite mean, and no atom of mass 111. The paper's "strictly positive (possibly infinite) variance" is read as "not almost surely constant".
  • cR=0c_R = 0cR​=0, b>0b > 0b>0, h>0h > 0h>0, c>0c > 0c>0, and L,L0L, L_0L,L0​ are natural numbers. The paper's standing assumption L>L0+1L > L_0 + 1L>L0​+1 is a hypothesis wherever the paper states it; in Theorem 1 it follows from the threshold.
  • Costs, expectations, C(π)C(\pi)C(π), OPT(L)\mathrm{OPT}(L)OPT(L), VαnV^n_\alphaVαn​ and Vα∞V^\infty_\alphaVα∞​ take values in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞], so infinite costs are never truncated. The ratio in Theorem 1 is stated as C(πr∗,S∗)<(1+ϵ)OPT(L)C(\pi_{r^*,S^*}) < (1+\epsilon)\mathrm{OPT}(L)C(πr∗,S∗​)<(1+ϵ)OPT(L), which is equivalent because 0<g≤OPT(L)≤U<∞0 < g \le \mathrm{OPT}(L) \le U < \infty0<g≤OPT(L)≤U<∞.
  • Π\PiΠ is exactly the paper's class: deterministic, time-dependent, measurable, nonnegative orders that depend on the pipeline and inventory. It is neither restricted to stationary policies nor enlarged to randomized ones. TBS policies are members, so C(πr,S)≥OPT(L)C(\pi_{r,S}) \ge \mathrm{OPT}(L)C(πr,S​)≥OPT(L) by construction.
  • ϑϵ∈[0,∞]\vartheta_\epsilon \in [0,\infty]ϑϵ​∈[0,∞] is the supremum of the minimizers of ϕϵ\phi_\epsilonϕϵ​ on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞), and it is ∞\infty∞ if the infimum is not attained; 1/∞=01/\infty = 01/∞=0.
  • The existence of a best TBS pair is asserted in the paper via JSS. The goal therefore also asserts that some TBS policy with 0≤r≤E[D]0 \le r \le \mathbb E[D]0≤r≤E[D] meets the bound, so it cannot hold vacuously when no minimizer exists.
  • rLr_LrL​ belongs to a witness of Theorem 2, and the results that use it hold for every witness.
  • The single-source class Πˉ\bar\PiΠˉ ("feasible nonanticipative policies, as typically defined") is read as nonnegative orders that are measurable functions of past demands. In Lemma 3 "increasing" is read as nondecreasing, and convexity in xxx includes finiteness.
  • The paper states Eq. (3) without a range for rrr; it is stated here for 0≤r≤E[D]0 \le r \le \mathbb E[D]0≤r≤E[D], the TBS parameters over which the paper optimizes. At r=E[D]r = \mathbb E[D]r=E[D] both sides are +∞+\infty+∞. In Lemma 8, the range's upper end is +∞+\infty+∞ when ϵ=0\epsilon = 0ϵ=0.
  • Differences such as Vα∞−VαnV^\infty_\alpha - V^n_\alphaVα∞​−Vαn​ and M∞r−MnrM^r_\infty - M^r_nM∞r​−Mnr​ are stated additively, and the negative terms of (9) and Corollary 3 are moved to the other side.

Lemma 1, Eq. (3) and Lemma 3 are results the paper quotes from Sheopuri et al. (2010), JSS and Scarf (1960). Proposition 1 (conditional-expectation form of the bound) is not included.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out: OPT(L)\mathrm{OPT}(L)OPT(L) ranges over the full admissible class, the constants are definitions rather than hypotheses, and the goal includes an existence clause.

Reusable beyond this mission: average-cost inventory models with lead times, discounted single-source backlog value functions, and Spitzer-type identities for random-walk maxima. Contributions to any milestone are welcome.

Selected references

  • L. Xin and D. A. Goldberg, Asymptotic Optimality of Tailored Base-Surge Policies in Dual-Sourcing Inventory Systems, Management Science 64(1):437–452, 2018. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.2016.2607
  • G. Janakiraman, S. Seshadri and A. Sheopuri, Analysis of Tailored Base-Surge Policies in Dual Sourcing Inventory Systems, Management Science 61(7):1547–1561, 2015.
  • G. Allon and J. A. Van Mieghem, Global Dual Sourcing: Tailored Base-Surge Allocation to Near- and Offshore Production, Management Science 56(1):110–124, 2010.
  • A. Sheopuri, G. Janakiraman and S. Seshadri, New Policies for the Stochastic Inventory Control Problem with Two Supply Sources, Operations Research 58(3):734–745, 2010.
  • H. Scarf, The Optimality of (s, S) Policies in the Dynamic Inventory Problem, in Mathematical Methods in the Social Sciences, Stanford University Press, 1960, pp. 196–202.
  • L. Xin and D. A. Goldberg, Optimality Gap of Constant-Order Policies Decays Exponentially in the Lead Time for Lost Sales Models, Operations Research 64(6):1556–1565, 2016.
20 thms3 active usersReviewed
Dynamic ProgrammingOperations ResearchStatistics·Captain: mikedeng1

Markovian Decision Processes with Uncertain Transition Probabilities II: Max-Max and Max-Min Optimal Returns Bound the Bayesian Optimal ReturnResearch Paper

Motivation

A Markovian decision process (Howard, 1960) models a controller who, in each of finitely many states, picks a decision, earns a reward and moves to a random next state according to known transition probabilities. In applications (inventory control, equipment replacement, quality control) those probabilities are estimated, not known. Satia and Lave (Operations Research 21(3), 1973) treat the uncertainty in two ways: a game-theoretic formulation, in which each unknown row only lies in a given set, and a Bayesian formulation, going back to Silver (1963) and Martin (1967), in which the controller holds a prior on the unknown matrix and learns from observed transitions.

The Bayesian problem is the natural one but its state includes the whole prior, so it cannot be solved exactly beyond small cases. The paper's contribution in the Bayesian part is a pair of computable bounds on the Bayesian optimal return in terms of the two game-theoretic values (max-max and max-min). This mission formalizes those bounds and the chain of facts they rest on.

Setting

There are NNN states iii and, in state iii, a finite nonempty set KiK_iKi​ of decisions. A transition i→ji \to ji→j under decision kkk earns rijkr^k_{ij}rijk​ and rewards are discounted by β\betaβ, 0≤β<10 \le \beta < 10≤β<1. The row pik=(pijk)jp_i^k = (p^k_{ij})_jpik​=(pijk​)j​ of transition probabilities is unknown; it is known to lie in a closed convex nonempty set SikS_i^kSik​ of probability vectors, and S={P:pik∈Sik for all i,k}S = \{P : p_i^k \in S_i^k \text{ for all } i, k\}S={P:pik​∈Sik​ for all i,k}.

A prior ggg is a probability distribution on matrices P=(pik)P = (p_i^k)P=(pik​) whose rows are all probability vectors. Its means are pˉijk=E(pijk)\bar p^k_{ij} = E(p^k_{ij})pˉ​ijk​=E(pijk​). After a transition l→jl \to jl→j under decision mmm the prior is replaced by the Bayes transformation Tljmg(P)=C pljm g(P)T^m_{lj} g(P) = C\,p^m_{lj}\,g(P)Tljm​g(P)=Cpljm​g(P) (Eq. (8)), with CCC the normalizing constant. The Bayesian optimal return f(i,g)f(i,g)f(i,g) solves the recursion

f(i,g)=max⁡k∈Ki{∑jpˉijkrijk+β∑jpˉijkf(j,Tijkg)}.(10)f(i, g) = \max_{k \in K_i} \Big\{ \sum_j \bar p^k_{ij} r^k_{ij} + \beta \sum_j \bar p^k_{ij} f(j, T^k_{ij} g) \Big\}. \qquad (10)f(i,g)=k∈Ki​max​{j∑​pˉ​ijk​rijk​+βj∑​pˉ​ijk​f(j,Tijk​g)}.(10)

The max-max and max-min values V+V^+V+, V−V^-V− solve

Vi±=max⁡k∈Kimax/min⁡pik∈Sik{∑jpijkrijk+β∑jpijkVj±},V_i^\pm = \max_{k \in K_i} \operatorname*{max/min}_{p_i^k \in S_i^k} \Big\{ \sum_j p^k_{ij} r^k_{ij} + \beta \sum_j p^k_{ij} V_j^\pm \Big\},Vi±​=k∈Ki​max​pik​∈Sik​max/min​{j∑​pijk​rijk​+βj∑​pijk​Vj±​},

with max for V+V^+V+ and min for V−V^-V−. Finally α=prob⁡(P∈S∣g)\alpha = \operatorname{prob}(P \in S \mid g)α=prob(P∈S∣g), the prior probability that the true matrix lies in SSS.

The Lean development lives in the namespace SatiaLave.Bayes: UncertainMDP, IsPrior, pbar, bayes, SolvesEq10, SolvesVplus, SolvesVminus, alpha, rmax, rmin, policyValue.

Formalization targets

Goal: Propositions 9 and 10

For every bounded solution fff of (10), all solutions V+V^+V+, V−V^-V−, every prior ggg and every state iii,

αVi−+(1−α)min⁡i,j,krijk1−β  ≤  f(i,g)  ≤  αVi++(1−α)max⁡i,j,krijk1−β,\alpha V_i^- + (1-\alpha)\min_{i,j,k}\frac{r^k_{ij}}{1-\beta} \;\le\; f(i,g) \;\le\; \alpha V_i^+ + (1-\alpha)\max_{i,j,k}\frac{r^k_{ij}}{1-\beta},αVi−​+(1−α)i,j,kmin​1−βrijk​​≤f(i,g)≤αVi+​+(1−α)i,j,kmax​1−βrijk​​,

together with the existence of fff, V+V^+V+ and V−V^-V−. Both halves are the paper's printed statements.

Milestones

  1. Proposition 6 (Martin): (9)/(10) has a unique bounded solution (unique at priors).
  2. No learning (p. 733): at a point-mass prior δP\delta_PδP​, f(⋅,δP)f(\cdot,\delta_P)f(⋅,δP​) solves the optimality equations of the process with known PPP.
  3. Proposition 8: f(i,g)f(i,g)f(i,g) is convex in ggg.
  4. Jensen step (proof of Proposition 9): f(i,g)≤∫f(i,δP) dg(P)f(i,g) \le \int f(i,\delta_P)\,dg(P)f(i,g)≤∫f(i,δP​)dg(P).
  5. Policy step (proof of Proposition 10): f(i,g)≥∫[q+βPAq+β2[PA]2q+⋯ ]i dg(P)f(i,g) \ge \int [q + \beta P^A q + \beta^2 [P^A]^2 q + \cdots]_i\,dg(P)f(i,g)≥∫[q+βPAq+β2[PA]2q+⋯]i​dg(P) for every pure stationary policy AAA.

Significance

The result. The bounds sandwich an intractable quantity between two quantities computable by finite algorithms (the max-max and max-min policy-iteration procedures of the same paper), weighted by a single prior probability α\alphaα. When the prior concentrates on SSS (α→1\alpha \to 1α→1) the bounds become Vi−≤f(i,g)≤Vi+V_i^- \le f(i,g) \le V_i^+Vi−​≤f(i,g)≤Vi+​: the Bayesian return lies between the pessimistic and optimistic robust values. They are the upper and lower bounds on the return that the paper's implicit-enumeration method (the decision tree of its Fig. 2 and Proposition 12) uses to compare decisions. The Jensen step is a value-of-information inequality (Bayesian optimal return is at most the expected full-information optimal return), which recurs throughout Bayesian control and bandit theory.

Formalizing it. The results are proved on paper (Propositions 6 and 8 by reference to Martin's book and Satia's thesis, Propositions 9 and 10 in the text); none is machine-checked. The mission produces a Lean model of Bayes-adaptive Markov decision processes with priors as measures, the Bayes transformation and its fixed-point recursion, and the link between the Bayesian and the robust (rectangular) formulations. Martin's existence-uniqueness theorem and the convexity of the Bayesian value are reusable for any Bayes-adaptive model.

Difficulty

The prior space is infinite-dimensional and not a vector space, so the recursion (10) lives on a space of measures, and the usual finite-state arguments do not apply verbatim. Proposition 8 gives convexity only along finite mixtures, while the proof of Proposition 9 applies Jensen's inequality to the integral mixture g=∫δP dg(P)g = \int \delta_P\,dg(P)g=∫δP​dg(P) of point masses; bridging the two, or proving the value-of-information inequality directly, is the central step. The paper also restricts the point masses to xik∈Sikx_i^k \in S_i^kxik​∈Sik​, which cannot represent a prior with mass outside SSS; the formal statement integrates over every transition matrix, as the next line of the paper's display requires. Measurability of P↦f(i,δP)P \mapsto f(i,\delta_P)P↦f(i,δP​) is not automatic, since fff is only characterized by a functional equation.

Formalization scope

  • States are a nonempty Fintype S; decisions a dependent family D i of nonempty finite types. A matrix is P : (i : S) → D i → S → ℝ with the product Borel σ\sigmaσ-algebra.
  • Priors are measures: a probability measure giving full mass to matrices whose rows are probability vectors. This generalizes the paper's densities g(P)g(P)g(P) and includes the point masses axa_xax​ its proof uses.
  • Bayes transformation at pˉ=0\bar p = 0pˉ​=0: the normalizing constant does not exist; bayes then returns ggg. That posterior is always multiplied by pˉ=0\bar p = 0pˉ​=0 in (10), so the choice is immaterial.
  • Readings of informal words. "The problem reduces to a Markovian decision process" = at a point-mass prior, fixed by every Bayes transformation, fff solves the known-PPP optimality equations. "Convex in ggg" = convex along mixtures of priors. "Unique set of bounded functions" = two bounded solutions agree at every prior (values at non-priors are unconstrained). "Satisfy (9)" is formalized as (10), which the paper derives from (9) by linearity of EEE. max⁡P∈S\max_{P\in S}maxP∈S​/min⁡P∈S\min_{P\in S}minP∈S​ in V±V^\pmV± is taken over the row pik∈Sikp_i^k \in S_i^kpik​∈Sik​ (the only row that enters; SSS is a product), as ⨆/⨅ over a nonempty bounded set. "Obviously f(i,g)≥ViAf(i,g)\ge V_i^Af(i,g)≥ViA​" is stated for every pure stationary policy AAA, not only a max-min optimal one. The policy return is the componentwise series ∑nβn(PA)nq\sum_n \beta^n (P^A)^n q∑n​βn(PA)nq.
  • Added hypotheses, not printed: 0≤β<10 \le \beta < 10≤β<1; Sik≠∅S_i^k \ne \emptysetSik​=∅; N≥1N \ge 1N≥1. Printed and kept: SikS_i^kSik​ closed and convex.
  • fff, V+V^+V+, V−V^-V− are quantified as solutions of their equations; α\alphaα is computed from ggg, never a free parameter; max⁡i,j,k[rijk/(1−β)]\max_{i,j,k}[r^k_{ij}/(1-\beta)]maxi,j,k​[rijk​/(1−β)] ranges over all states i,ji,ji,j and k∈Kik \in K_ik∈Ki​. Integrability of the integrands in milestones 4 and 5 is part of their conclusions.
  • Trivializations ruled out. A free α∈[0,1]\alpha \in [0,1]α∈[0,1], or fff defined off priors, would make the goal false or vacuous; the goal also asserts that bounded fff and V±V^\pmV± exist, so its universal part is not vacuous.
  • Not in scope: Proposition 7 (matrix-beta conjugacy, which needs a Dirichlet distribution), Propositions 11–13 and the numerical example.

Welcome contributions: the Banach fixed-point argument for (10) on bounded functions of priors; lemmas that bayes maps priors to priors and that point masses are fixed; continuity of the known-PPP optimal value in PPP; a general Jensen inequality for functions convex along mixtures of probability measures.

Selected references

  • J. K. Satia and R. E. Lave, Jr., Markovian Decision Processes with Uncertain Transition Probabilities, Operations Research 21(3), 728–740, 1973. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.21.3.728
  • J. J. Martin, Bayesian Decision Problems and Markov Chains, Wiley, New York, 1967.
  • E. A. Silver, Markovian Decision Processes with Uncertain Transition Probabilities or Rewards, Interim Technical Report No. 1, Operations Research Center, Massachusetts Institute of Technology, August 1963.
  • R. A. Howard, Dynamic Programming and Markov Processes, MIT Press, 1960.
  • J. K. Satia, Markovian Decision Process with Uncertain Transition Matrices or/and Probabilistic Observation of States, Ph.D. dissertation, Stanford University, 1968.
7 thms3 active usersReviewed
Operations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Optimizing Strategic Safety Stock Placement in Supply Chains: Binding Base Stocks Are Optimal in a Serial System without Guaranteed Internal ServiceResearch Paper

Motivation

Where to hold safety stock in a multi-stage supply chain is a basic question of inventory planning. Graves and Willems (MSOM 2(1), 2000) optimize safety-stock placement under the guaranteed-service assumption: each stage quotes a service time to its customers and always meets it. That assumption makes the placement problem tractable, and it is the basis of the dynamic program in the body of the paper and of later work built on it. It also has a price. A stage that promises a service time must hold enough stock to keep the promise even when it would be cheaper to let a downstream stage absorb an occasional delay.

The paper's Appendix measures that price in the simplest setting where it can be computed exactly. The setting is a serial chain in which internal stages promise nothing and only the external customer is guaranteed 100% service. Its one theorem, called the Result, characterizes the optimal base stocks of this relaxed model in closed form. The paper then compares that policy with the guaranteed-service optimum on 36 test instances. The guaranteed-service counterpart of this serial model, Simpson's all-or-nothing property of optimal service times, is on Prove2Me as a separate statement (SupplyChainTheory.gs_all_or_nothing, from Snyder and Shen's textbook). This mission formalizes the other side of the comparison.

Setting

A serial supply chain has NNN stages. Stage 111 is the demand node and stage iii supplies stage i−1i-1i−1 for i=2,…,Ni = 2, \dots, Ni=2,…,N. Time is discrete, with periods t∈Zt \in \mathbb{Z}t∈Z. Stage iii has a deterministic lead time Ti∈NT_i \in \mathbb{N}Ti​∈N and a base stock Bi∈RB_i \in \mathbb{R}Bi​∈R. It follows a base-stock policy: in each period it observes end-item demand and orders that amount from its supplier.

The end-item demand in period ttt is d(t)d(t)d(t). The window demand is d(a,b]=d(a+1)+⋯+d(b)d(a, b] = d(a+1) + \dots + d(b)d(a,b]=d(a+1)+⋯+d(b), which is 000 when a≥ba \ge ba≥b. The demand bound D:N→RD : \mathbb{N} \to \mathbb{R}D:N→R gives D(τ)D(\tau)D(τ), the maximum possible end-item demand over τ\tauτ periods, with D(0)=0D(0) = 0D(0)=0.

The backlog Qi(t)Q_i(t)Qi​(t) is the amount the customer of stage iii has ordered but not yet received. It satisfies the recursion (A1):

Qi(t)=[d(t−Ti,t]+Qi+1(t−Ti)−Bi]+,QN+1≡0.Q_i(t) = \bigl[d(t - T_i, t] + Q_{i+1}(t - T_i) - B_i\bigr]^+, \qquad Q_{N+1} \equiv 0 .Qi​(t)=[d(t−Ti​,t]+Qi+1​(t−Ti​)−Bi​]+,QN+1​≡0.

Unrolling it gives the closed max-form (A2). The external customer receives 100% service when Q1(t)=0Q_1(t) = 0Q1​(t)=0 for all ttt. When demand never exceeds its bound, this is ensured by the service constraints

B1+⋯+Bi≥D(T1+⋯+Ti),i=1,…,N.(A3)B_1 + \dots + B_i \ge D(T_1 + \dots + T_i), \qquad i = 1, \dots, N. \tag{A3}B1​+⋯+Bi​≥D(T1​+⋯+Ti​),i=1,…,N.(A3)

Let hih_ihi​ be the holding cost at stage iii and ei=hi−hi+1e_i = h_i - h_{i+1}ei​=hi​−hi+1​ the echelon holding cost. After constant terms are dropped, the expected holding cost gives program P∗\mathbf P^*P∗:

min⁡B ∑i=1NhiBi−∑i=2Nei−1E[Qi]s.t. (A3) and Bi≥0.\min_B\ \sum_{i=1}^N h_i B_i - \sum_{i=2}^N e_{i-1} E[Q_i] \quad\text{s.t. (A3) and } B_i \ge 0 .Bmin​ i=1∑N​hi​Bi​−i=2∑N​ei−1​E[Qi​]s.t. (A3) and Bi​≥0.

Demand is random, and E[Qi]E[Q_i]E[Qi​] is the expected backlog at stage iii in a period ttt.

Formalization targets

Goal: the Result, Eq. (A6)

If the echelon holding costs are nonnegative and DDD is nondecreasing, then an optimal solution of P∗\mathbf P^*P∗ is

B1=D(T1),Bi=D(T1+⋯+Ti)−D(T1+⋯+Ti−1),i=2,…,N.(A6)B_1 = D(T_1), \qquad B_i = D(T_1 + \dots + T_i) - D(T_1 + \dots + T_{i-1}), \quad i = 2, \dots, N. \tag{A6}B1​=D(T1​),Bi​=D(T1​+⋯+Ti​)−D(T1​+⋯+Ti−1​),i=2,…,N.(A6)

Formally, (A6) is feasible, and for every period ttt its objective value is at most that of every feasible vector. The goal names this vector and compares it with every feasible BBB. The weaker claim that "some optimal solution binds all of (A3)" would not be enough.

Milestones

  1. Eq. (A2). The closed max-form of Qi(t)Q_i(t)Qi​(t), derived from the recursion (A1).
  2. Eq. (A3). Under the demand bound d(a,a+s]≤D(s)d(a, a+s] \le D(s)d(a,a+s]≤D(s), the constraints (A3) force Q1≡0Q_1 \equiv 0Q1​≡0 (sufficiency).
  3. (A6) is feasible and is the unique binding solution of (A3).
  4. Backlog bounds under a transfer. Moving Δ≥0\Delta \ge 0Δ≥0 units of base stock from stage kkk to stage k+1k+1k+1 leaves E[Qi]E[Q_i]E[Qi​] unchanged for i>k+1i > k+1i>k+1 and raises it by at most Δ\DeltaΔ for i≤ki \le ki≤k. It lowers E[Qk+1]E[Q_{k+1}]E[Qk+1​] by at most Δ\DeltaΔ.
  5. Eqs. (A7)–(A8). For k<Nk < Nk<N, the transfer that makes the kkk-th constraint binding keeps the vector feasible and does not raise the objective.
  6. The case k=Nk = Nk=N. Lowering BNB_NBN​ until the NNN-th constraint binds does not raise the objective.

Significance

The Result shows that, without guaranteed internal service, the optimal base stocks do not depend on the holding costs, provided the echelon costs are nonnegative. Each stage then covers exactly the increment of maximal demand that its own lead time adds. This closed form is the benchmark against which the paper measures the cost of guaranteed service: 26% more safety-stock holding cost on average over its test problems. The paper also remarks, without proof, that Rosling's transformation extends the Result to assembly systems.

The Result is proved in the paper. As far as is known, neither it nor the backlog identity (A2) has been machine-checked. A complete development would yield a verified model of serial base-stock backlogs under bounded demand. It would also verify an exchange argument that recurs in multi-echelon inventory theory: moving stock toward the customer, with echelon costs controlling the sign of the change.

Difficulty

The objective is not linear in BBB. Each E[Qi]E[Q_i]E[Qi​] is a convex, nonsmooth function of Bi,…,BNB_i, \dots, B_NBi​,…,BN​ through the maximum in (A2), and the objective subtracts these terms, so P∗\mathbf P^*P∗ minimizes a concave function over a polyhedron. The obvious approaches are linear-programming duality and convex first-order optimality conditions on P∗\mathbf P^*P∗, and neither applies. The result is a comparison of objective values between arbitrary feasible vectors and (A6). It has to hold pathwise under every demand distribution, and it then has to be carried through expectations. The hypotheses the Result leaves implicit must be recovered from the rest of the paper. Two of them, stated below, are necessary.

Formalization scope

Stages are natural numbers read on the range {1,…,N}\{1, \dots, N\}{1,…,N}. Lead times are natural numbers cast to Z\mathbb{Z}Z. Base stocks, holding costs and the demand bound are real-valued. A base-stock vector is a function N→R\mathbb{N} \to \mathbb{R}N→R, and only indices 1,…,N1, \dots, N1,…,N are read. The backlog is defined by the recursion (A1), computed in N+1−iN + 1 - iN+1−i steps, with Qi≡0Q_i \equiv 0Qi​≡0 for i>Ni > Ni>N. The closed form (A2) is a theorem. Randomness is a probability space (Ω,μ)(\Omega, \mu)(Ω,μ) with a demand path d(ω,⋅)d(\omega, \cdot)d(ω,⋅) whose value in each period is integrable. The integrability of the backlog is not assumed; it follows from the integrability of demand.

The page's informal words are read as follows:

  • "The echelon holding costs are nonnegative" means hi−hi+1≥0h_i - h_{i+1} \ge 0hi​−hi+1​≥0 for 1≤i<N1 \le i < N1≤i<N, and hN≥0h_N \ge 0hN​≥0, i.e. eN≥0e_N \ge 0eN​≥0 with hN+1:=0h_{N+1} := 0hN+1​:=0. The case k=Nk = Nk=N of the proof uses hN≥0h_N \ge 0hN​≥0. Without it the Result is false (N=1N = 1N=1, h1<0h_1 < 0h1​<0).
  • D(0)=0D(0) = 0D(0)=0 is the paper's convention (§2, p. 70) and is added as a hypothesis. Without it (A6) can be infeasible (D≡−1D \equiv -1D≡−1 is nondecreasing).
  • "D( )D(\,)D() is a nondecreasing function" means Monotone D on N\mathbb{N}N.
  • "An optimal solution to P∗\mathbf P^*P∗" means feasible, with objective at most that of every feasible vector.
  • "E[Qi]E[Q_i]E[Qi​]" means the expectation of Qi(t)Q_i(t)Qi​(t) at a fixed period ttt. Every statement holds for all ttt, and stationarity is not assumed. The paper writes E[Qi]E[Q_i]E[Qi​] without ttt because its demand is stationary, and this reading is at least as strong.
  • The demand bound d(a,a+s]≤D(s)d(a, a+s] \le D(s)d(a,a+s]≤D(s) appears only in milestone 2. The Result does not use it, so it is not a hypothesis of the goal.
  • Eq. (A3) is formalized in the sufficiency direction only. The page's necessity remark ("as we assume that the demand bounds can be realized") is not stated.

A non-integrable backlog would make its Bochner integral 000 and erase the backlog terms of the objective. The formalization rules this out by assuming integrable demand, which makes the backlogs integrable; it does not assume the backlogs themselves integrable. Out of scope: the spanning-tree dynamic program of §5, the unproved remarks of §§3–4, the Rosling extension, the Kodak application and the computational study.

Useful contributions include a proof of (A2) by downward induction on stages, the integrability of Qi(t)Q_i(t)Qi​(t), the pathwise version of milestone 4, and the iteration argument that assembles milestones 3, 5 and 6 into the goal.

Selected references

  • S. C. Graves and S. P. Willems, Optimizing Strategic Safety Stock Placement in Supply Chains, Manufacturing & Service Operations Management 2(1):68–83, 2000. https://doi.org/10.1287/msom.2.1.68.23267
  • K. F. Simpson, In-Process Inventories, Operations Research 6(6):863–873, 1958. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.6.6.863
  • K. Rosling, Optimal Inventory Policies for Assembly Systems under Random Demands, Operations Research 37(4):565–579, 1989. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.37.4.565
  • L. V. Snyder and Z.-J. M. Shen, Fundamentals of Supply Chain Theory, Wiley, 2nd ed., 2019. https://doi.org/10.1002/9781119584445
9 thms3 active usersReviewed
CombinatoricsOperations ResearchOptimization+1·Captain: mikedeng1

Approximation Techniques for Average Completion Time Scheduling I: Best-α on One Machine with Release DatesResearch Paper

Motivation

Minimizing the average completion time of jobs that arrive over time is one of the basic objectives of machine scheduling: it measures how long, on average, a job waits in the system. On a single machine with release dates and no preemption (written 1∣rj∣∑Cj1|r_j|\sum C_j1∣rj​∣∑Cj​), the problem is strongly NP-hard, so research has focused on approximation algorithms whose guarantees are stated against every feasible schedule.

The standard route runs through the preemptive relaxation. When jobs may be interrupted and resumed, the shortest-remaining-processing-time rule (SRPT) produces an optimal schedule, and its value is a lower bound for every nonpreemptive schedule. The question is how to turn that preemptive schedule into a nonpreemptive one without losing too much.

Timeline:

  • 1995, Phillips, Stein and Wein (WADS 1995, pp. 86–97): order the jobs by their SRPT completion times and schedule them nonpreemptively in that order. This gives a 2-approximation. Later 2-approximations are by Hoogeveen and Vestjens (IPCO 1996), Stougie (1995), and Goemans (SODA 1997). Hoogeveen and Vestjens also showed that deterministic on-line algorithms cannot beat 2.
  • 2001, Chekuri, Motwani, Natarajan and Stein (SIAM J. Comput. 31(1)): order by α\alphaα-points instead of completion times, choose α\alphaα at random, and take the best α\alphaα off-line. This gives the e/(e−1)≈1.58e/(e-1)\approx1.58e/(e−1)≈1.58 bound for Best-α\alphaα that is the goal of this mission, and an optimal randomized on-line algorithm.
  • 1999, Afrati et al. (FOCS 1999): a polynomial-time approximation scheme for 1∣rj∣∑wjCj1|r_j|\sum w_jC_j1∣rj​∣∑wj​Cj​. This settled the approximability of the problem, but the resulting algorithms are far from simple.

Setting

An instance has nnn jobs J0,…,Jn−1J_0,\dots,J_{n-1}J0​,…,Jn−1​. Job JjJ_jJj​ has a processing time pj>0p_j>0pj​>0, a release date rj≥0r_j\ge0rj​≥0, and, where the objective is weighted, a weight wj>0w_j>0wj​>0. There is one machine.

A nonpreemptive schedule assigns each job a start time Sj≥rjS_j\ge r_jSj​≥rj​ such that the intervals [Sj,Sj+pj)[S_j,S_j+p_j)[Sj​,Sj​+pj​) are pairwise disjoint. Its completion times are Cj=Sj+pjC_j=S_j+p_jCj​=Sj​+pj​.

A preemptive schedule PPP specifies, for each time ttt, which job runs at ttt, if any. Job JjJ_jJj​ runs only at times t≥max⁡(0,rj)t\ge\max(0,r_j)t≥max(0,rj​), receives exactly pjp_jpj​ units of processing in total, and finishes by some finite time. Its completion time CjPC^P_jCjP​ is the first time by which all of JjJ_jJj​ has been processed. For α∈(0,1]\alpha\in(0,1]α∈(0,1], its α\alphaα-point CjP(α)C^P_j(\alpha)CjP​(α) is the first time by which αpj\alpha p_jαpj​ units have been processed.

For a job JiJ_iJi​, TiT_iTi​ denotes the idle time of PPP before CiPC^P_iCiP​. xijx_{ij}xij​ denotes the fraction of JjJ_jJj​ processed before CiPC^P_iCiP​. The paper writes SiP(β)S^P_i(\beta)SiP​(β) for the set of jobs with xij=βx_{ij}=\betaxij​=β, and also for their total processing time.

One-machine list scheduling in a given order runs the jobs nonpreemptively in that order. Each job starts at the later of its release date and the completion of the previous job in the list. An α\alphaα-schedule is list scheduling in nondecreasing order of the α\alphaα-points CjP(α)C^P_j(\alpha)CjP​(α). CjαC^\alpha_jCjα​ denotes the completion times of an α\alphaα-schedule.

Random-α\alphaα draws α\alphaα from a distribution on (0,1](0,1](0,1] and outputs the α\alphaα-schedule. Best-α\alphaα outputs the α\alphaα-schedule of smallest total completion time min⁡α∑jCjα\min_\alpha\sum_j C^\alpha_jminα​∑j​Cjα​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Corollary 2.7

Let PPP be optimal among preemptive schedules for ∑jCj\sum_j C_j∑j​Cj​. Then there is α∈(0,1]\alpha\in(0,1]α∈(0,1] such that every α\alphaα-schedule derived from PPP satisfies

∑jCjα  ≤  ee−1∑jCjfor every feasible nonpreemptive schedule (Cj)j.\sum_j C^\alpha_j\;\le\;\frac{e}{e-1}\sum_j C_j\qquad\text{for every feasible nonpreemptive schedule } (C_j)_j .j∑​Cjα​≤e−1e​j∑​Cj​for every feasible nonpreemptive schedule (Cj​)j​.

Since Best-α\alphaα returns a schedule no worse than this α\alphaα-schedule, Best-α\alphaα is an e/(e−1)e/(e-1)e/(e−1)-approximation.

Milestones

  1. The calculus behind the constant. For f(α)=eα/(e−1)f(\alpha)=e^\alpha/(e-1)f(α)=eα/(e−1) and every β∈(0,1]\beta\in(0,1]β∈(0,1],
∫0β1+α−ββf(α) dα=1e−1.\int_0^\beta\frac{1+\alpha-\beta}{\beta}f(\alpha)\,d\alpha=\frac1{e-1}.∫0β​β1+α−β​f(α)dα=e−11​.
  1. Lemma 2.2: CiP=Ti+∑0<β≤1βSiP(β)C^P_i=T_i+\sum_{0<\beta\le1}\beta S^P_i(\beta)CiP​=Ti​+∑0<β≤1​βSiP​(β).
  2. Lemma 2.3: Ciα≤Ti+(1+α)∑β≥αSiP(β)+∑β<αβSiP(β)C^\alpha_i\le T_i+(1+\alpha)\sum_{\beta\ge\alpha}S^P_i(\beta)+\sum_{\beta<\alpha}\beta S^P_i(\beta)Ciα​≤Ti​+(1+α)∑β≥α​SiP​(β)+∑β<α​βSiP​(β).
  3. Lemma 2.5: if α\alphaα has density fff on (0,1](0,1](0,1], then E[Ciα]≤(1+δ)CiPE[C^\alpha_i]\le(1+\delta)C^P_iE[Ciα​]≤(1+δ)CiP​ with δ=max⁡0<β≤1∫0β1+α−ββf(α) dα\delta=\max_{0<\beta\le1}\int_0^\beta\frac{1+\alpha-\beta}{\beta}f(\alpha)\,d\alphaδ=max0<β≤1​∫0β​β1+α−β​f(α)dα.
  4. Theorem 2.6, for the weighted objective with PPP optimal among preemptive schedules: the expected approximation ratio of Random-α\alphaα is at most 222 for uniform α\alphaα, at most 1.81.81.8 for α=1\alpha=1α=1 w.p. 3/53/53/5 and α=1/2\alpha=1/2α=1/2 w.p. 2/52/52/5, and at most e/(e−1)e/(e-1)e/(e−1) for the density eα/(e−1)e^\alpha/(e-1)eα/(e−1).

Companion statements, not milestones:

  • the upper bound of Theorem 2.1, ∑jCjα≤(1+1/α)∑jCjP\sum_jC^\alpha_j\le(1+1/\alpha)\sum_jC^P_j∑j​Cjα​≤(1+1/α)∑j​CjP​;
  • the existence of an optimal preemptive schedule.

Significance

The e/(e−1)e/(e-1)e/(e−1) bound shows that conversion from the preemptive relaxation can beat the factor 2 of the natural ordering. It does so by exploiting that no single instance is bad for many values of α\alphaα at once. The α\alphaα-point technique was also used with LP relaxations, for example by Goemans (SODA 1997) and by Schulz and Skutella. The randomized version is an optimal randomized on-line algorithm for 1∣rj∣∑Cj1|r_j|\sum C_j1∣rj​∣∑Cj​. Lemma 2.3 is a statement about any preemptive schedule, so it applies wherever a good preemptive or fractional schedule is available.

All results of the mission are proved in the paper, except that the proof of Theorem 2.6, part 2 is omitted there. No machine-checked proof of them is known. A complete development would give a verified model of preemptive one-machine schedules, α\alphaα-points and list scheduling, together with the averaging argument over α\alphaα. These are reusable for the later results of the same paper and for the α\alphaα-point literature.

Difficulty

The obvious argument bounds each job's α\alphaα-schedule completion time directly against its preemptive completion time. That argument loses a factor 1+1/α1+1/\alpha1+1/α (Theorem 2.1), which is at least 2 for every fixed α\alphaα. The improvement needs Lemma 2.3. There the charge to each job depends on how much of it was done by CiPC^P_iCiP​ relative to α\alphaα, and the idle time TiT_iTi​ is not inflated at all. Proving Lemma 2.3 requires reasoning about a preemptive schedule as a measure on time, and about how moving pieces of jobs changes completion times. A proof that treats the preemptive schedule as a finite list of pieces must first show that nothing is lost by this discretization.

The averaging step needs the expectation over α\alphaα to be an honest integral. The map α↦Ciα\alpha\mapsto C^\alpha_iα↦Ciα​ must be shown integrable, which requires a fixed rule for ties between equal α\alphaα-points.

Formalization scope

  • Model. Jobs are Fin n, time is real, pj>0p_j>0pj​>0 and rj≥0r_j\ge0rj​≥0. The paper admits pj=0p_j=0pj​=0 only in its tightness instances.
    • A preemptive schedule is a function σ:R→\sigma:\mathbb R\toσ:R→ Option (Fin n) (none = idle). Each job's run set is measurable, lies in [max⁡(0,rj),∞)[\max(0,r_j),\infty)[max(0,rj​),∞), is bounded above, and has Lebesgue measure pjp_jpj​.
    • Completion times and α\alphaα-points are infima of nonempty sets that are bounded below.
    • TiT_iTi​ is the measure of the idle set in [0,CiP)[0,C^P_i)[0,CiP​).
    • The paper's sums over β\betaβ are sums over jobs, weighted by the fraction xijx_{ij}xij​.
  • List scheduling is strict: jobs never overtake the list order, and the machine is free from time 000.
    • Lemma 2.3, Theorem 2.1, Theorem 2.6.2 and the goal hold for every tie-break among equal α\alphaα-points.
    • The expectations (Lemma 2.5, Theorem 2.6.1 and 2.6.3) use the tie-break by job index. They assert integrability as part of the conclusion.
  • Optimality. "Approximation ratio ccc" is stated as an inequality against every feasible nonpreemptive schedule, never against an infimum.
    • The optimality of PPP among preemptive schedules is the paper's standing assumption for its upper bounds (p. 151). It appears as a hypothesis of Theorem 2.6 and of the goal.
    • The lemmas hold for arbitrary PPP and do not carry it.
    • An existence statement shows the hypothesis can be met.
  • Lemma 2.5's δ\deltaδ is replaced by any upper bound of the integrals over β∈(0,1]\beta\in(0,1]β∈(0,1]. This is equivalent, and it avoids assuming that the maximum is attained.
  • Not stated:
    • the running time O(n2)O(n^2)O(n2) of Best-α\alphaα and the optimality of SRPT;
    • the tightness parts of Theorem 2.1 and Corollary 2.4, and the lower bounds of Theorem 2.9, which use zero-length jobs;
    • the on-line Theorem 2.8, which needs a model of on-line algorithms.
  • Trivializing formalization ruled out. Dropping the optimality of PPP from the goal would turn it into a statement about arbitrary preemptive schedules, which is Lemma 2.5, not Corollary 2.7. Comparing against ∑jCjP\sum_jC^P_j∑j​CjP​ instead of every nonpreemptive schedule would likewise remove the content of the corollary.

Contributions are welcome at every level. The calculus milestone and Lemma 2.2 are good first targets.

Selected references

  • C. Chekuri, R. Motwani, B. Natarajan, C. Stein, Approximation Techniques for Average Completion Time Scheduling, SIAM J. Comput. 31(1):146–166, 2001. https://doi.org/10.1137/S0097539797327180
  • C. Phillips, C. Stein, J. Wein, Scheduling jobs that arrive over time, Proc. 4th Workshop on Algorithms and Data Structures (WADS), 1995, pp. 86–97 (reference [25] of the paper; no link verified).
  • J. A. Hoogeveen, A. P. A. Vestjens, Optimal on-line algorithms for single-machine scheduling, Proc. 5th IPCO, 1996, pp. 404–414 (reference [21]; no link verified).
  • M. X. Goemans, Improved approximation algorithms for scheduling with release dates, Proc. 8th ACM-SIAM SODA, 1997, pp. 591–598 (reference [12]; no link verified).
  • F. Afrati et al., Approximation schemes for minimizing average weighted completion time with release dates, Proc. 40th FOCS, 1999 (reference [2]; no link verified).
9 thms3 active usersReviewed
Machine LearningStatistics·Captain: mikedeng1

The Power of Convex Relaxation: Near-Optimal Matrix Completion III: No Method Recovers Incoherent Rank-r Matrices below the Sampling Rate (I.20)Research Paper

Motivation

Matrix completion asks to recover a matrix from a small random subset of its entries. It models collaborative filtering (a ratings table with most entries missing), sensor-network localisation from partial distance data, and system identification. With no structure the task is hopeless, so one assumes the matrix has low rank rrr and that its information is not concentrated in a few entries (incoherence).

Candès and Recht (Found. Comput. Math., 2009) showed that nuclear-norm minimisation recovers such a matrix from about n6/5rlog⁡nn^{6/5} r\log nn6/5rlogn random entries. Candès and Tao (IEEE Trans. Inf. Theory, 2010) lowered this to nr polylog(n)n r\,\mathrm{polylog}(n)nrpolylog(n). The same paper also asks how few entries any method could possibly use, and answers it with a lower bound, Theorem 1.7: below about μ0nrlog⁡n\mu_0 n r\log nμ0​nrlogn observed entries, no algorithm can succeed. This mission formalizes that lower bound. The two upper bounds of the same paper are separate missions of this series.

Setting

Work with real n×nn\times nn×n matrices. For a matrix MMM, let U⊆RnU \subseteq \mathbb{R}^nU⊆Rn be its column space and V⊆RnV\subseteq \mathbb{R}^nV⊆Rn its row space, and let PUP_UPU​, PVP_VPV​ be the orthogonal projections onto them. Let eae_aea​ be the aaa-th standard basis vector.

Fix an integer rrr and a real μ0\mu_0μ0​. A matrix MMM has rank at most rrr and obeys the incoherence property with parameter μ0\mu_0μ0​ (the paper's (I.18)) if rank⁡M≤r\operatorname{rank}M \le rrankM≤r and

∥PUea∥2≤μ0rn,∥PVeb∥2≤μ0rnfor all a,b∈[n].\|P_U e_a\|^2 \le \frac{\mu_0 r}{n},\qquad \|P_V e_b\|^2 \le \frac{\mu_0 r}{n}\qquad\text{for all } a,b\in[n].∥PU​ea​∥2≤nμ0​r​,∥PV​eb​∥2≤nμ0​r​for all a,b∈[n].

Since ∑a∥PUea∥2=dim⁡U\sum_a \|P_U e_a\|^2 = \dim U∑a​∥PU​ea​∥2=dimU, a matrix of rank exactly rrr can satisfy this only when μ0≥1\mu_0\ge 1μ0​≥1; the smallest possible value μ0=1\mu_0 = 1μ0​=1 means the column and row spaces are spread evenly over the coordinates.

Bernoulli sampling. Fix m≥1m \ge 1m≥1 and set p=m/n2p = m/n^2p=m/n2. The observed set Ω⊆[n]×[n]\Omega\subseteq[n]\times[n]Ω⊆[n]×[n] contains each entry independently with probability ppp, so mmm is the expected number of observed entries. The sampling operator PΩ\mathcal{P}_\OmegaPΩ​ keeps the entries of a matrix that lie in Ω\OmegaΩ and sets the others to 000. A recovery method sees only PΩ(M)\mathcal{P}_\Omega(M)PΩ​(M).

The sampling conditions are, with the natural logarithm,

m≥n2(1−e−μ0rnlog⁡(n2δ))(I.20)m \ge n^2\left(1 - e^{-\frac{\mu_0 r}{n}\log\left(\frac{n}{2\delta}\right)}\right) \qquad \text{(I.20)}m≥n2(1−e−nμ0​r​log(2δn​))(I.20) m≥(1−ϵ) μ0nrlog⁡(n2δ),ϵ:=12μ0rnlog⁡(n2δ).(I.21)m \ge (1-\epsilon)\,\mu_0 n r\log\left(\frac{n}{2\delta}\right),\qquad \epsilon := \frac12\frac{\mu_0 r}{n}\log\left(\frac{n}{2\delta}\right). \qquad \text{(I.21)}m≥(1−ϵ)μ0​nrlog(2δn​),ϵ:=21​nμ0​r​log(2δn​).(I.21)

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1.7 (p. 2058)

Fix 1≤m1 \le m1≤m, 1≤r≤n1 \le r \le n1≤r≤n, μ0≥1\mu_0\ge 1μ0​≥1 and 0<δ<1/20<\delta<1/20<δ<1/2, with ℓ:=n/(μ0r)\ell := n/(\mu_0 r)ℓ:=n/(μ0​r) an integer. If (I.20) fails, or (I.21) fails, then

PΩ(there are infinitely many pairs M≠M′ of rank≤r, incoherent with parameter μ0, with PΩ(M)=PΩ(M′)) ≥ δ.\mathbb{P}_\Omega\Bigl(\text{there are infinitely many pairs } M\ne M' \text{ of rank} \le r, \text{ incoherent with parameter } \mu_0, \text{ with } \mathcal{P}_\Omega(M)=\mathcal{P}_\Omega(M')\Bigr) \ \ge\ \delta .PΩ​(there are infinitely many pairs M=M′ of rank≤r, incoherent with parameter μ0​, with PΩ​(M)=PΩ​(M′)) ≥ δ.

On that event, the observations cannot tell MMM from M′M'M′, so no method can recover every such matrix with probability greater than 1−δ1-\delta1−δ. The statement fixes no constant beyond those the paper prints.

Milestones (Section II)

  1. For pairwise disjoint sets of entries S1,…,SnS_1,\dots,S_nS1​,…,Sn​ of size ℓ\ellℓ, P(every Sa is sampled)=(1−(1−p)ℓ)n\mathbb{P}(\text{every } S_a \text{ is sampled}) = (1-(1-p)^\ell)^nP(every Sa​ is sampled)=(1−(1−p)ℓ)n.
  2. For n≥1n\ge1n≥1, π∈[0,1]\pi\in[0,1]π∈[0,1] and 0<δ<1/20<\delta<1/20<δ<1/2: (1−π)n≥1−δ(1-\pi)^n \ge 1-\delta(1−π)n≥1−δ implies π≤2δ/n\pi \le 2\delta/nπ≤2δ/n.
  3. With p=m/n2p = m/n^2p=m/n2 and the theorem's parameters: (1−p)ℓ≤2δ/n(1-p)^\ell \le 2\delta/n(1−p)ℓ≤2δ/n implies (I.20).
  4. 1−e−x>x−x2/21-e^{-x} > x - x^2/21−e−x>x−x2/2 for every x>0x>0x>0 (the paper prints x≥0x\ge0x≥0; see Formalization scope).
  5. The second part of Theorem 1.7: for the theorem's parameters, (I.20) implies (I.21).

Significance

The result. Theorem 1.7 shows that the sample complexity nr polylog(n)n r\,\mathrm{polylog}(n)nrpolylog(n) of the paper's upper bounds is close to optimal: about μ0nrlog⁡n\mu_0 n r\log nμ0​nrlogn entries are necessary, however the matrix is reconstructed. The count exceeds the 2nr−r22nr - r^22nr−r2 degrees of freedom of a rank-rrr matrix by the factor μ0log⁡n\mu_0\log nμ0​logn. The logarithm is a coupon-collector effect: every row has to be sampled. The factor μ0\mu_0μ0​ shows that the oversampling grows in proportion to the coherence. The bound is information-theoretic, and it holds even when the rank bound and the coherence are known in advance.

Formalizing it. The theorem and its proof in Section II are published. No machine-checked version is known to exist, and the platform has no lower bound for matrix completion. A formal proof would also check the printed argument, whose steps are compressed. It would yield reusable pieces: a Lean predicate for incoherence of matrices of bounded rank built on Mathlib's orthogonal projections, the independence computation for Bernoulli sampling over disjoint entry sets, and the elementary estimates that turn a success probability into a sampling rate.

Difficulty

The probabilistic and analytic parts are elementary. The difficulty is in building the hard instances as matrices and certifying them. For each observation set one has to exhibit, on an event of probability at least δ\deltaδ, an infinite family of distinct pairs that agree on Ω\OmegaΩ. Every member must have rank at most rrr and meet both incoherence bounds, measured through projections onto its column and row spaces, and the pairs must stay distinct across the family. The paper describes the instances only informally. They have to be pinned down so that whatever distinguishes MMM from M′M'M′ is really invisible on Ω\OmegaΩ, while the incoherence bounds still hold for every admissible μ0≥1\mu_0\ge1μ0​≥1 and r≤nr\le nr≤n. Computing the column space and the projection norms of an explicit matrix in Lean is the main infrastructure cost.

Formalization scope

Matrices are Matrix (Fin n) (Fin n) ℝ (the platform's MatrixCompletion.RealMatrix n n). The observation model is the platform's bernoulliEventProb with rate m/n2m/n^2m/n2, the sum over all Ω\OmegaΩ of p∣Ω∣(1−p)n2−∣Ω∣p^{|\Omega|}(1-p)^{n^2-|\Omega|}p∣Ω∣(1−p)n2−∣Ω∣. The sampling operator is the platform's samplingProjection. Logarithms and exponentials are Real.log, Real.exp. The mission's own definitions are IncoherentRankAtMost r μ₀ M (rank at most rrr, with the projection bounds computed from Mathlib's Submodule.starProjection onto the ranges of MMM and M⊤M^\topM⊤ in EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n)) and SamplingConditionI20, SamplingConditionI21.

The formalization commits to four readings:

  • Order of quantifiers. The event is "the set of bad pairs is infinite", evaluated for each Ω\OmegaΩ, so the pairs may depend on Ω\OmegaΩ. This is what Section II establishes and what the sentence after the theorem uses. The reading "fixed M≠M′M\ne M'M=M′ with P(PΩ(M)=PΩ(M′))≥δ\mathbb{P}(\mathcal{P}_\Omega(M) = \mathcal{P}_\Omega(M'))\ge\deltaP(PΩ​(M)=PΩ​(M′))≥δ" is a different statement and is not the goal.
  • Integrality of ℓ\ellℓ. The hypothesis that ℓ=n/(μ0r)\ell = n/(\mu_0 r)ℓ=n/(μ0​r) is an integer is the paper's own "without loss of generality" of Section II, and it is stated explicitly. It forces μ0r≤n\mu_0 r \le nμ0​r≤n.
  • "Fix 1≤m,r≤n1\le m, r\le n1≤m,r≤n" is read as 1≤m1\le m1≤m and 1≤r≤n1\le r\le n1≤r≤n. No upper bound on mmm is imposed, since the failure of (I.20) already gives m<n2m<n^2m<n2.
  • Standing assumptions. Section I-H assumes m≥2nrm\ge 2nrm≥2nr and nnn larger than an absolute constant for the rest of the paper. Those assumptions serve the upper bounds. Theorem 1.7 lists its own ranges, and only those are imposed.

The hypothesis "(I.20) fails or (I.21) fails" covers both parts of the theorem. The last sentence of Section II proves the second part from 1−e−x>x−x2/21 - e^{-x} > x - x^2/21−e−x>x−x2/2, which the paper states "whenever x≥0x \ge 0x≥0". At x=0x=0x=0 the two sides are equal, so the strict inequality is false there; milestone 4 states the corrected range x>0x>0x>0, which is all the paper uses, since its x=μ0rnlog⁡n2δx = \frac{\mu_0 r}{n}\log\frac{n}{2\delta}x=nμ0​r​log2δn​ is positive.

Trivializing formalizations are ruled out. The set of pairs requires M≠M′M\ne M'M=M′, so the diagonal pairs (M,M)(M,M)(M,M) do not count. "Infinitely many" is Set.Infinite of a set of pairs, not "at least one". Incoherence uses the theorem's rrr and the actual column and row spaces, so the class is the paper's. The hypotheses are satisfiable, for example n=4n=4n=4, r=1r=1r=1, μ0=1\mu_0=1μ0​=1, ℓ=4\ell=4ℓ=4, δ=0.1\delta=0.1δ=0.1, m=1m=1m=1.

Contributions are welcome on every milestone. The Bernoulli independence computation and the incoherence predicate can be reused in the other two missions of this series and in any lower bound for sampling problems.

Selected references

  • E. J. Candès and T. Tao, The Power of Convex Relaxation: Near-Optimal Matrix Completion, IEEE Transactions on Information Theory 56(5):2053–2080, 2010. https://doi.org/10.1109/TIT.2010.2044061
  • E. J. Candès and B. Recht, Exact Matrix Completion via Convex Optimization, Foundations of Computational Mathematics 9(6):717–772, 2009. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10208-009-9045-5
12 thms3 active usersReviewed
Algorithmic Game TheoryOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

The Allocation of Inventory Risk in a Supply Chain: Push, Pull, and Advance-Purchase Discount Contracts 3: Advance-Purchase Discounts Pareto-Improve Pull Contracts under At-Once Shipping CostsResearch Paper

Motivation

A supplier and a retailer who trade a seasonal product must decide who carries the inventory risk: the stock left unsold, or the demand left unserved, when the season ends. With a push contract the retailer orders everything before the season and bears the risk; with a pull contract he orders during the season from the supplier's stock at a single wholesale price, and the supplier bears it. Cachon (Management Science 50(2), 2004) studies the two and the contract between them, the advance-purchase discount, in which units ordered before the season are cheaper than units ordered during it.

In the base model of that paper, shipping a unit during the season costs the same as shipping it before. In practice orders placed during the season are often smaller and more urgent, and shipping and handling them costs more. §5.1 of the paper adds such a cost and asks whether pull contracts remain attractive. Theorem 8 answers that they are then never Pareto efficient: some advance-purchase discount is better for both firms.

Setting

Demand DDD for the season has law μ\muμ on R\mathbb RR, distribution function FFF and density fff. As in §3 of the paper, F(0)=0F(0) = 0F(0)=0, FFF is strictly increasing on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞), F′=fF' = fF′=f on (0,∞)(0,\infty)(0,∞), and the generalized failure rate g(x)=xf(x)/(1−F(x))g(x) = x f(x)/(1 - F(x))g(x)=xf(x)/(1−F(x)) is strictly increasing (IGFR). The expected sales from qqq available units are

S(q)=q−∫0qF(x) dx.S(q) = q - \int_0^q F(x)\,dx .S(q)=q−∫0q​F(x)dx.

The retail price is ppp, the unit production cost ccc, the salvage value vvv, with v<c<pv < c < pv<c<p.

A contract is a pair of wholesale prices {w1,w2}\{w_1, w_2\}{w1​,w2​}. Before production the retailer submits a prebook order of y≥0y \ge 0y≥0 units at w1w_1w1​. The supplier then produces q≥yq \ge yq≥y. During the season, after running out of prebooked stock, the retailer places at-once orders at w2w_2w2​, filled from the supplier's remaining stock. Pull is w1=w2<pw_1 = w_2 < pw1​=w2​<p; an advance-purchase discount is w1<w2w_1 < w_2w1​<w2​. In §5.1 the supplier pays an extra shipping and handling cost τ>0\tau > 0τ>0 per at-once unit. The profits are

πr(y,q)=−(w1−v)y+(p−v)S(y)+(p−w2)(S(q)−S(y)),\pi_r(y,q) = -(w_1 - v)y + (p - v)S(y) + (p - w_2)\bigl(S(q) - S(y)\bigr),πr​(y,q)=−(w1​−v)y+(p−v)S(y)+(p−w2​)(S(q)−S(y)), πs(y,q)=(w1−v)y+(w2−τ−v)(S(q)−S(y))−(c−v)q.\pi_s(y,q) = (w_1 - v)y + (w_2 - \tau - v)\bigl(S(q) - S(y)\bigr) - (c - v)q .πs​(y,q)=(w1​−v)y+(w2​−τ−v)(S(q)−S(y))−(c−v)q.

A supplier best response to yyy maximizes πs(y,⋅)\pi_s(y,\cdot)πs​(y,⋅) over q≥yq \ge yq≥y. An outcome of {w1,w2}\{w_1, w_2\}{w1​,w2​} is a pair (y,q)(y, q)(y,q) with qqq a best response to yyy and y≥0y \ge 0y≥0 maximizing πr\pi_rπr​ when every alternative prebook is followed by a best response to it.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 8

Fix w2<pw_2 < pw2​<p and τ>0\tau > 0τ>0, and suppose the retailer does not prebook under the pull contract {w2,w2}\{w_2, w_2\}{w2​,w2​}: y=0y = 0y=0 is his unique best reply, followed by the supplier's best response q0q_0q0​. Then there is w1w_1w1​ with

c<w1<w2c < w_1 < w_2c<w1​<w2​

such that {w1,w2}\{w_1, w_2\}{w1​,w2​} has an outcome, and every outcome (y,q)(y, q)(y,q) of it satisfies

πr{w1,w2}(y,q)>πr{w2,w2}(0,q0),πs{w1,w2}(y,q)>πs{w2,w2}(0,q0).\pi_r^{\{w_1,w_2\}}(y,q) > \pi_r^{\{w_2,w_2\}}(0,q_0), \qquad \pi_s^{\{w_1,w_2\}}(y,q) > \pi_s^{\{w_2,w_2\}}(0,q_0).πr{w1​,w2​}​(y,q)>πr{w2​,w2​}​(0,q0​),πs{w1​,w2​}​(y,q)>πs{w2​,w2​}​(0,q0​).

Milestones

  1. Eq. (22): for v<w1≤w2≤pv < w_1 \le w_2 \le pv<w1​≤w2​≤p the retailer's profit is concave in yyy and uniquely maximized at yry_ryr​ with F(yr)=(w2−w1)/(w2−v)F(y_r) = (w_2 - w_1)/(w_2 - v)F(yr​)=(w2​−w1​)/(w2​−v), whatever qqq.
  2. Eqs. (20)–(21) with w2−τw_2 - \tauw2​−τ: the supplier's best response to yyy is max⁡{y,qs}\max\{y, q_s\}max{y,qs​} with F(qs)=(w2−τ−c)/(w2−τ−v)F(q_s) = (w_2 - \tau - c)/(w_2 - \tau - v)F(qs​)=(w2​−τ−c)/(w2​−τ−v), independent of w1w_1w1​, and qsq_sqs​ is smaller than without the shipping cost.
  3. §5.1: for fixed w2w_2w2​ the retailer is never worse off with w1≤w2w_1 \le w_2w1​≤w2​ than with w1=w2w_1 = w_2w1​=w2​.
  4. yr(w1)>0y_r(w_1) > 0yr​(w1​)>0 for every w1<w2w_1 < w_2w1​<w2​.
  5. The derivative of w1↦πs(yr(w1),q)w_1 \mapsto \pi_s(y_r(w_1), q)w1​↦πs​(yr​(w1​),q), where the density at yr(w1)y_r(w_1)yr​(w1​) is positive:
dπs(yr(w1),q)dw1=yr(w1)−(w1−v)−(w2−τ−v)(1−F(yr(w1)))(w2−v)f(yr(w1)).\frac{d\pi_s(y_r(w_1), q)}{dw_1} = y_r(w_1) - \frac{(w_1 - v) - (w_2 - \tau - v)(1 - F(y_r(w_1)))}{(w_2 - v) f(y_r(w_1))}.dw1​dπs​(yr​(w1​),q)​=yr​(w1​)−(w2​−v)f(yr​(w1​))(w1​−v)−(w2​−τ−v)(1−F(yr​(w1​)))​.
  1. yr(w1)→0y_r(w_1) \to 0yr​(w1​)→0 as w1→w2w_1 \to w_2w1​→w2​, and, when fff has a positive right limit f(0)f(0)f(0) at 000, the derivative in 5 tends to −τ/((w2−v)f(0))<0-\tau/((w_2 - v) f(0)) < 0−τ/((w2​−v)f(0))<0.

Significance

Without shipping costs, advance-purchase discounts with w2=pw_2 = pw2​=p coordinate the supply chain (Theorem 7 of the paper, the subject of mission 2 of this series), and a pull contract can lie in the Pareto set among push and pull contracts (Theorem 6, mission 1). Theorem 8 shows that the second fact does not survive an at-once shipping cost of any size: pulling inventory during the season incurs a cost the integrated chain would avoid, and a small discount for early commitment shifts part of the stock to the prebook, where it is cheaper to ship. The Pareto set then no longer consists of a single contract type. The result supports the paper's conclusion that each of its three extensions makes push relatively more attractive than pull.

The theorem is proved in the paper, not formalized anywhere. A formal proof requires making precise two points the paper passes over: what "the retailer does not prebook" means when the retailer could switch to a large prebook once a discount is offered, and why no positive density at 000 is needed. Formalized, the statement also gives a checked account of the prebook game under a two-price contract, reusable for the other extensions of §5.

Difficulty

The paper's argument differentiates the supplier's profit along the retailer's optimal prebook and takes the limit as w1→w2w_1 \to w_2w1​→w2​. That limit involves f(0)f(0)f(0), which the model does not provide: FFF is differentiable only on (0,∞)(0, \infty)(0,∞), and for gamma demand with shape above 111 the density vanishes at 000, so the paper's limit is −∞-\infty−∞. A proof of the goal must therefore not rest on the limit display alone.

The second obstacle is the retailer's global choice. The calculus concerns prebooks yr(w1)y_r(w_1)yr​(w1​) below the supplier's production qsq_sqs​. Once w1<w2w_1 < w_2w1​<w2​, the retailer might instead prefer a prebook at least qsq_sqs​, turning the chain into push mode, and the outcome would then not be the one the derivative describes. Ruling this out for w1w_1w1​ close to w2w_2w2​ requires the strict form of the premise and a uniform comparison of the two regimes; it is not a local argument at yry_ryr​.

Formalization scope

Demand is a probability measure μ on ℝ with F := ProbabilityTheory.cdf μ, and the standing assumptions of §3 form the predicate DemandModel μ f; differentiability of F is required on (0,∞)(0,\infty)(0,∞) only, so the exponential law is admitted. Quantities range over [0,∞)[0, \infty)[0,∞). Best responses and outcomes are defined as maximizers, not by the closed forms of milestones 1 and 2. All profit formulas are those of §4.5 for w2≤pw_2 \le pw2​≤p, and every statement assumes it. The shipping cost enters only the supplier's at-once net revenue w2−τw_2 - \tauw2​−τ. The prebook function yry_ryr​ in milestones 5 and 6 is a function pinned on (v,w2)(v, w_2)(v,w2​) by Eq. (22), which determines it uniquely.

Readings of the paper's words:

  • "the retailer does not prebook when w1=w2w_1 = w_2w1​=w2​" is read as "y=0y = 0y=0 is the retailer's unique best reply" (every y>0y > 0y>0 gives strictly less); with a tie the conclusion can fail;
  • "profit increases for both" is read as a strict increase for both firms, in every outcome of the discounted contract;
  • the conclusion c<w1c < w_1c<w1​ strengthens "advance-purchase discount" (w1<w2w_1 < w_2w1​<w2​);
  • "reduces the supplier's optimal production" (milestone 2) is a strict decrease; its formula is stated for c≤w2−τc \le w_2 - \tauc≤w2​−τ;
  • "f(0)f(0)f(0)" in milestone 6 is the right limit of fff at 000, assumed positive there only; the positivity of f(yr(w1))f(y_r(w_1))f(yr​(w1​)) in milestone 5 is the hypothesis of the implicit-function step;
  • "never worse off" (milestone 3) compares every outcome of {w1,w2}\{w_1, w_2\}{w1​,w2​} with every outcome of {w2,w2}\{w_2, w_2\}{w2​,w2​}.

A version of the goal that assumed f(0)>0f(0) > 0f(0)>0, assumed yr(w1)<qsy_r(w_1) < q_syr​(w1​)<qs​, compared only one favourably chosen outcome of the discounted contract, or stated either firm's gain with ≥\ge≥, would be weaker than Theorem 8 and is not the target.

A complete development needs the concavity and first-order conditions for SSS, the inverse-function derivative for FFF, and the regime comparison between prebooks below and above qsq_sqs​. The first two are reusable across all newsvendor-type models; contributions proving the milestones in any order are welcome.

Selected references

  • G. P. Cachon, The Allocation of Inventory Risk in a Supply Chain: Push, Pull, and Advance-Purchase Discount Contracts, Management Science 50(2):222–238, 2004. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.1030.0190
  • M. A. Lariviere, E. L. Porteus, Selling to the Newsvendor: An Analysis of Price-Only Contracts, Manufacturing & Service Operations Management 3(4):293–305, 2001. https://doi.org/10.1287/msom.3.4.293.9971
9 thms3 active usersReviewed
Algorithmic Game TheoryOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

The Allocation of Inventory Risk in a Supply Chain: Push, Pull, and Advance-Purchase Discount Contracts 2: Advance-Purchase Discounts Coordinate the Supply ChainResearch Paper

Motivation

A supplier who must produce before a selling season, and a retailer who sells into uncertain demand, have to decide who holds the inventory that may go unsold. Cachon (Management Science 50(2), 2004) studies this allocation of inventory risk using nothing but wholesale prices. With a push contract the retailer orders everything before production and bears all the risk; with a pull contract the retailer orders only during the season and the supplier bears it; an advance-purchase discount sits between the two, offering a lower price for early orders. The paper's introduction contrasts Trek, which holds bicycle inventory and ships to retailers on demand, with O'Neill, which offers retailers a prebook discount for ordering before the season.

The classical view is that wholesale-price contracts cannot coordinate a supply chain: a single wholesale price above marginal cost makes the retailer order too little (the double-marginalization effect). Coordination was known to need richer terms, such as buyback contracts (Pasternack 1985) or revenue sharing (Cachon and Lariviere 2005). This mission formalizes the paper's Theorem 7, which shows that two wholesale prices, one for early and one for in-season orders, suffice both to coordinate the chain and to divide its profit arbitrarily. A companion mission of the same series formalizes Theorem 6, the Pareto set of push and pull contracts alone.

Setting

Demand is a random variable with distribution function FFF and density fff. The paper assumes F(0)=0F(0) = 0F(0)=0, FFF strictly increasing, and an increasing generalized failure rate (IGFR): g(x)=xf(x)/(1−F(x))g(x) = x f(x)/(1 - F(x))g(x)=xf(x)/(1−F(x)) has g′(x)>0g'(x) > 0g′(x)>0. Production costs ccc per unit, the retail price is ppp, and leftover units are salvaged for vvv, with v<c<pv < c < pv<c<p. Expected sales with qqq units available are

S(q)=q−∫0qF(x) dx,S(q) = q - \int_0^q F(x)\,dx,S(q)=q−∫0q​F(x)dx,

and the integrated supply chain's expected profit is Π(q)=(p−v)S(q)−(c−v)q\Pi(q) = (p - v)S(q) - (c - v)qΠ(q)=(p−v)S(q)−(c−v)q. It is maximized at qoq^oqo with F(qo)=(p−c)/(p−v)F(q^o) = (p-c)/(p-v)F(qo)=(p−c)/(p−v); write Πo=Π(qo)\Pi^o = \Pi(q^o)Πo=Π(qo). The efficiency of a contract is Π(q)/Πo\Pi(q)/\Pi^oΠ(q)/Πo, where qqq is the quantity produced.

A contract is a pair of wholesale prices {w1,w2}\{w_1, w_2\}{w1​,w2​} with w1≤w2w_1 \le w_2w1​≤w2​. The retailer first prebooks y≥0y \ge 0y≥0 units at w1w_1w1​ each. The supplier, seeing yyy, produces q≥yq \ge yq≥y. During the season the retailer sells the prebook and, once it runs out, places at-once orders at w2w_2w2​ per unit from the supplier's remaining stock, provided w2≤pw_2 \le pw2​≤p. The supplier's and retailer's expected profits are

πs(y,q)=(w1−v)y+(w2−v)(S(q)−S(y))−(c−v)q,\pi_s(y, q) = (w_1 - v)y + (w_2 - v)(S(q) - S(y)) - (c - v)q,πs​(y,q)=(w1​−v)y+(w2​−v)(S(q)−S(y))−(c−v)q, πr(y,q)=−(w1−v)y+(p−v)S(y)+(p−w2)(S(q)−S(y)),\pi_r(y, q) = -(w_1 - v)y + (p - v)S(y) + (p - w_2)(S(q) - S(y)),πr​(y,q)=−(w1​−v)y+(p−v)S(y)+(p−w2​)(S(q)−S(y)),

with the at-once terms absent when w2>pw_2 > pw2​>p. An outcome of a contract is a pair (y,q)(y, q)(y,q) where qqq maximizes the supplier's profit given yyy, and yyy maximizes the retailer's profit given that he anticipates the supplier's response. The contract classes are push (w1<p<w2w_1 < p < w_2w1​<p<w2​), pull (w1=w2≤pw_1 = w_2 \le pw1​=w2​≤p) and advance-purchase discount (w1<w2≤pw_1 < w_2 \le pw1​<w2​≤p). A contract is Pareto if no outcome of any contract in these classes makes one firm strictly better off and neither firm worse off than one of its own outcomes (p. 224).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 7

For every w1w_1w1​ with c≤w1≤pc \le w_1 \le pc≤w1​≤p, the contract {w1,p}\{w_1, p\}{w1​,p} has an outcome and is Pareto; every outcome (y,q)(y, q)(y,q) of every Pareto contract satisfies

Π(q)=Πo;\Pi(q) = \Pi^o;Π(q)=Πo;

and for every r∈[0,Πo]r \in [0, \Pi^o]r∈[0,Πo] some contract {w1,p}\{w_1, p\}{w1​,p} with c≤w1≤pc \le w_1 \le pc≤w1​≤p has an outcome with payoffs

(πr,πs)=(r, Πo−r).\bigl(\pi_r, \pi_s\bigr) = \bigl(r,\ \Pi^o - r\bigr).(πr​,πs​)=(r, Πo−r).

Milestones

  1. Eq. (2): Π\PiΠ is concave on [0,∞)[0, \infty)[0,∞) and maximized exactly where F(qo)=(p−c)/(p−v)F(q^o) = (p-c)/(p-v)F(qo)=(p−c)/(p−v).
  2. Eqs. (20)–(21): for c≤w2≤pc \le w_2 \le pc≤w2​≤p, the supplier's best response to yyy is max⁡{y,qs}\max\{y, q_s\}max{y,qs​} with F(qs)=(w2−c)/(w2−v)F(q_s) = (w_2 - c)/(w_2 - v)F(qs​)=(w2​−c)/(w2​−v).
  3. Eq. (22): for c≤w1≤w2≤pc \le w_1 \le w_2 \le pc≤w1​≤w2​≤p, yry_ryr​ with F(yr)=(w2−w1)/(w2−v)F(y_r) = (w_2 - w_1)/(w_2 - v)F(yr​)=(w2​−w1​)/(w2​−v) is the unique maximizer of πr(⋅,q)\pi_r(\cdot, q)πr​(⋅,q).
  4. Eq. (3): in push mode the retailer's optimal prebook solves F(q)=(p−w^1)/(p−v)F(q) = (p - \hat w_1)/(p - v)F(q)=(p−w^1​)/(p−v).

A further draft theorem states the step of the proof in which the retailer's outcome profit along {w1,p}\{w_1, p\}{w1​,p} falls strictly from Πo\Pi^oΠo to 000 as w1w_1w1​ rises from ccc to ppp.

Significance

The theorem identifies a coordinating family inside the simplest contract language there is. Setting the at-once price equal to the retail price gives the supplier exactly the chain's marginal incentive for capacity, so she produces qoq^oqo; the prebook price then acts as a pure transfer. Every division of Πo\Pi^oΠo is reached, so for any bargaining process the Pareto set is fully efficient. This contrasts with Theorem 6 of the same paper, where push and pull contracts alone leave the Pareto set inefficient, and with the buyback and revenue-sharing coordination results (formalized on the platform as Theorems 14.4–14.6 of Snyder and Shen's Fundamentals of Supply Chain Theory), which need contract terms beyond wholesale prices.

The result is proved in the paper and has not been machine-checked. The mission produces a formal prebook game (best responses, outcomes and Pareto dominance as optimization statements) and Theorem 7 with all three claims, including the claim about every Pareto contract, which the paper argues in one sentence.

Difficulty

The closed forms are fractile equations, and the obvious argument substitutes them. That argument is incomplete in three places. First, the retailer's anticipated profit is piecewise: below the supplier's own quantity he gets at-once service, above it the chain runs in push mode, and the proof must show the retailer never prefers the push branch when w2=pw_2 = pw2​=p. Second, "every Pareto contract is efficient" is a statement about all contracts, including push and pull, and needs both firms' payoffs to be nonnegative at every outcome of every admissible contract, which depends on the prebook y=0y = 0y=0 always being available and on w1≥cw_1 \ge cw1​≥c. Third, the division claim is surjectivity of the retailer's equilibrium payoff over w1∈[c,p]w_1 \in [c, p]w1​∈[c,p], which needs the solution of F(yr)=(p−w1)/(p−v)F(y_r) = (p - w_1)/(p - v)F(yr​)=(p−w1​)/(p−v) to vary continuously with w1w_1w1​, including at both ends (yr=qoy_r = q^oyr​=qo at w1=cw_1 = cw1​=c, yr=0y_r = 0yr​=0 at w1=pw_1 = pw1​=p).

Formalization scope

Demand is a probability measure μ\muμ on R\mathbb RR with FFF = ProbabilityTheory.cdf μ. The standing assumptions are a structure: F(0)=0F(0) = 0F(0)=0, FFF strictly increasing on [0,∞)[0, \infty)[0,∞), F′=fF' = fF′=f on (0,∞)(0, \infty)(0,∞), and g′>0g' > 0g′>0 on (0,∞)(0, \infty)(0,∞). Differentiability is required only on (0,∞)(0, \infty)(0,∞), so the exponential distribution, which the paper names as IGFR, is admitted. Theorem 7 does not use IGFR; it is kept so that the series shares one model. Quantities range over [0,∞)[0, \infty)[0,∞). qoq^oqo is a parameter with the hypothesis F(qo)=(p−c)/(p−v)F(q^o) = (p-c)/(p-v)F(qo)=(p−c)/(p−v); its existence is part of milestone 1.

Readings of informal words: "includes all" means every contract {w1,p}\{w_1, p\}{w1​,p} with c≤w1≤pc \le w_1 \le pc≤w1​≤p has an outcome and each of its outcomes is undominated; "the Pareto set coordinates" is stated for every Pareto contract, not only the w2=pw_2 = pw2​=p family; "any division is achievable" is surjectivity onto [0,Πo][0, \Pi^o][0,Πo]; "increasing" in Eq. (2) and "decreases" in the proof are strict; "arg max" in Eqs. (3) and (22) is the unique maximizer; "the optimal production is max⁡{y,qs}\max\{y, q_s\}max{y,qs​}" is an if-and-only-if characterization of the supplier's best responses. At-once orders are submitted exactly when w2≤pw_2 \le pw2​≤p (p. 226, "with push w2>pw_2 > pw2​>p, so at-once orders are never submitted"). Additions to the paper's contract classes: every class requires w1≥cw_1 \ge cw1​≥c (p. 228 sets aside w^1<c\hat w_1 < cw^1​<c as Pareto inferior); pull includes w1=w2=pw_1 = w_2 = pw1​=w2​=p (the paper's remark in the proof) and advance-purchase discounts include w2=pw_2 = pw2​=p (as Theorem 7 names them). Pareto dominance is between payoff pairs of outcomes.

Outcomes are defined as maximizers, not by the closed forms (21)–(22). Defining the outcome of {w1,p}\{w_1, p\}{w1​,p} as (yr,qo)(y_r, q^o)(yr​,qo) would turn the goal into algebra, and is ruled out.

Needed infrastructure: continuity and inverse of a strictly increasing distribution function, concavity of SSS, and first-order conditions on half-lines. The definitions of the prebook game are reusable for Theorem 8 of the same paper. Proofs of the milestones and of the goal are welcome.

Selected references

  • G. P. Cachon, The Allocation of Inventory Risk in a Supply Chain: Push, Pull, and Advance-Purchase Discount Contracts, Management Science 50(2):222–238, 2004. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.1030.0190
  • M. A. Lariviere and E. L. Porteus, Selling to the Newsvendor: An Analysis of Price-Only Contracts, Manufacturing & Service Operations Management 3(4):293–305, 2001. https://doi.org/10.1287/msom.3.4.293.9971
  • B. A. Pasternack, Optimal Pricing and Return Policies for Perishable Commodities, Marketing Science 4(2):166–176, 1985. https://doi.org/10.1287/mksc.4.2.166
  • G. P. Cachon and M. A. Lariviere, Supply Chain Coordination with Revenue-Sharing Contracts: Strengths and Limitations, Management Science 51(1):30–44, 2005. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.1040.0215
  • L. V. Snyder and Z.-J. M. Shen, Fundamentals of Supply Chain Theory, 2nd ed., Wiley, 2019. https://doi.org/10.1002/9781119584445
7 thms3 active usersReviewed
Operations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

The Allocation of Inventory Risk in a Supply Chain: Push, Pull, and Advance-Purchase Discount Contracts 1: The Pareto Set of Push and Pull ContractsResearch Paper

Who bears the inventory risk

A supplier and a retailer trade a product with a single selling season and uncertain demand. Someone has to decide, before demand is known, how many units exist, and someone has to be left holding the units that do not sell. With a push contract the retailer orders (prebooks) before the season and bears all of this risk; with a pull contract the supplier produces to stock and the retailer only orders during the season, so the supplier bears it. Both are single wholesale price contracts, the simplest and most common contracts in practice. Cachon (Management Science 50(2), 2004) asks which of these contracts two negotiating firms could plausibly agree on, independently of how they bargain, and answers it by computing the Pareto set of push and pull contracts together.

Push alone is the "selling to the newsvendor" problem studied by Lariviere and Porteus (MSOM 2001), whose unimodality result this mission uses. The novelty of §4 of Cachon's paper is to put push and pull contracts in one contract space and to show that the Pareto set then contains contracts of both kinds.

Setting

Demand has distribution function FFF and density fff. The paper's standing assumptions (§3, p. 225) are: F(0)=0F(0) = 0F(0)=0, FFF strictly increasing, and the generalized failure rate g(x)=xf(x)/(1−F(x))g(x) = x f(x)/(1 - F(x))g(x)=xf(x)/(1−F(x)) strictly increasing (IGFR); the normal, exponential, gamma and Weibull laws qualify. Units cost ccc to produce, sell at the retail price p>cp > cp>c, and are salvaged at v<cv < cv<c.

Expected sales with qqq units available are S(q)=q−∫0qF(x) dxS(q) = q - \int_0^q F(x)\,dxS(q)=q−∫0q​F(x)dx, and the integrated chain earns Π(q)=(p−v)S(q)−(c−v)q\Pi(q) = (p - v)S(q) - (c - v)qΠ(q)=(p−v)S(q)−(c−v)q. It is maximized at the newsvendor quantity qoq^oqo, F(qo)=(p−c)/(p−v)F(q^o) = (p - c)/(p - v)F(qo)=(p−c)/(p−v), with Πo=Π(qo)\Pi^o = \Pi(q^o)Πo=Π(qo); the efficiency of a contract is Π(q)/Πo\Pi(q)/\Pi^oΠ(q)/Πo.

A contract is described by the quantity qqq it induces.

  • Push at wholesale price w^1\hat w_1w^1​: the retailer prebooks qqq and earns π^r=(p−v)S(q)−(w^1−v)q\hat\pi_r = (p - v)S(q) - (\hat w_1 - v)qπ^r​=(p−v)S(q)−(w^1​−v)q; the supplier earns π^s=(w^1−c)q\hat\pi_s = (\hat w_1 - c)qπ^s​=(w^1​−c)q. The price inducing qqq is w^1(q)=p−(p−v)F(q)\hat w_1(q) = p - (p - v)F(q)w^1​(q)=p−(p−v)F(q), and π^r(q)\hat\pi_r(q)π^r​(q), π^s(q)\hat\pi_s(q)π^s​(q) are the payoffs at that price.
  • Pull at wholesale price w1=w2w_1 = w_2w1​=w2​: the supplier produces qqq and earns πs=(w1−v)S(q)−(c−v)q\pi_s = (w_1 - v)S(q) - (c - v)qπs​=(w1​−v)S(q)−(c−v)q; the retailer earns πr=(p−w1)S(q)\pi_r = (p - w_1)S(q)πr​=(p−w1​)S(q). The inducing price is w1(q)=(c−vF(q))/(1−F(q))w_1(q) = (c - vF(q))/(1 - F(q))w1​(q)=(c−vF(q))/(1−F(q)).

Write j(q)=S(q)/(1−F(q))j(q) = S(q)/(1 - F(q))j(q)=S(q)/(1−F(q)) and h(q)=f(q)/(1−F(q))h(q) = f(q)/(1 - F(q))h(q)=f(q)/(1−F(q)) (the hazard rate). The retailer's preferred pull contract is q∗=arg⁡max⁡πrq^* = \arg\max \pi_rq∗=argmaxπr​ and the supplier's preferred push contract is q^∗=arg⁡max⁡π^s\hat q^* = \arg\max \hat\pi_sq^​∗=argmaxπ^s​.

A contract k′k'k′ Pareto dominates kkk if no firm is worse off and one firm is strictly better off; the Pareto set consists of the contracts no other contract dominates.

A pull contract is only played as pull if the retailer does not prefer to prebook anyway. In the prebook game (§4.5) the retailer prebooks y≥0y \ge 0y≥0 and the supplier then chooses her production Q≥yQ \ge yQ≥y to maximize (w1−v)y+(w2−v)(S(Q)−S(y))−(c−v)Q(w_1 - v)y + (w_2 - v)(S(Q) - S(y)) - (c - v)Q(w1​−v)y+(w2​−v)(S(Q)−S(y))−(c−v)Q. A pull contract survives the push challenge if the retailer's profit is strictly highest at y=0y = 0y=0.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 6 with Lemma 5

There is a quantity qPq^PqP, 0<qP<qo0 < q^P < q^o0<qP<qo, the unique positive quantity at which each firm is indifferent between the pull and the push contract, such that

Pareto set={push,pull}×[qP,qo],\text{Pareto set} = \{\text{push}, \text{pull}\} \times [q^P, q^o],Pareto set={push,pull}×[qP,qo],

and every pull contract with q∈[qP,qo]q \in [q^P, q^o]q∈[qP,qo] survives the push challenge.

Milestones, in the order the proof uses them

  • Eqs. (1)–(2), (3), (7): the newsvendor quantity qoq^oqo; the prices w^1(q)\hat w_1(q)w^1​(q), w1(q)w_1(q)w1​(q) induce qqq.
  • Eqs. (5), (9) and Lariviere–Porteus: π^r\hat\pi_rπ^r​ and πs\pi_sπs​ are increasing, π^s\hat\pi_sπ^s​ is unimodal.
  • Lemma 1: j(q)h(q)j(q)h(q)j(q)h(q) is increasing for q>0q > 0q>0. Theorem 2: πr\pi_rπr​ is concave.
  • Theorem 3: πr(q∗)>π^s(q^∗)\pi_r(q^*) > \hat\pi_s(\hat q^*)πr​(q∗)>π^s​(q^​∗), q∗>q^∗q^* > \hat q^*q∗>q^​∗, Π(q∗)>Π(q^∗)\Pi(q^*) > \Pi(\hat q^*)Π(q∗)>Π(q^​∗).
  • Lemma 4: qPq^PqP exists, is the unique positive root of πr=π^r\pi_r = \hat\pi_rπr​=π^r​ and of πs=π^s\pi_s = \hat\pi_sπs​=π^s​, the unique maximizer of πr−π^s\pi_r - \hat\pi_sπr​−π^s​, and qP>q∗q^P > q^*qP>q∗.
  • Eqs. (20)–(21) and Lemma 5: the supplier's reply to a prebook yyy is max⁡{y,qs}\max\{y, q_s\}max{y,qs​}; pull contracts with q≥qPq \ge q^Pq≥qP survive the push challenge.

Significance

The theorem says that when both allocations of inventory risk are on the table, neither firm's preferred contract (q^∗\hat q^*q^​∗ for the supplier, q∗q^*q∗ for the retailer) is Pareto, and the least efficient Pareto contract, qPq^PqP, is more efficient than the least efficient contract of either push-only or pull-only negotiation. In the Pareto set the supplier prefers every pull contract to every push contract and the retailer the reverse, so each firm earns more by bearing the risk itself. The results are proved in the paper, with the calculus informal, the unimodality of π^s\hat\pi_sπ^s​ cited, and half of Theorem 6's proof called "analogous". The mission produces a machine-checked version under exactly stated hypotheses; the IGFR concavity and single-crossing facts (Lemma 1, Theorem 2, Lemma 4) are reusable for other contract analyses. No part of this paper is formalized elsewhere; a related platform statement, Snyder–Shen Theorem 14.3 (SupplyChainTheory.wholesale_supplier_unimodal), is the Lariviere–Porteus lemma under stronger assumptions (nonnegative salvage value, finite mean, a continuous positive density, and only a weakly increasing failure rate).

Difficulty

The comparisons are between functions of different shapes: the supplier's push profit is a margin times a quantity, the retailer's pull profit a margin times expected sales. Signing derivatives needs the monotonicity of j(q)h(q)j(q)h(q)j(q)h(q) (Lemma 1), and that fails to be routine at q→0q \to 0q→0, where FFF need not be differentiable. The set equality compares four profit curves at once, and survival of the push challenge is a statement about a different game, the supplier's best reply to every prebook.

Formalization scope

Demand is a probability measure μ\muμ on R\mathbb RR with FFF = ProbabilityTheory.cdf μ. The predicate DemandModel μ f records F(0)=0F(0) = 0F(0)=0, FFF strictly increasing on [0,∞)[0, \infty)[0,∞), F′=fF' = fF′=f on (0,∞)(0, \infty)(0,∞), and g′(x)>0g'(x) > 0g′(x)>0 for x>0x > 0x>0. Differentiability is not required at 000: the exponential law has a kink there, and it is the paper's own IGFR example. Prices satisfy v<c<pv < c < pv<c<p; no sign is imposed on vvv. Quantities range over [0,∞)[0, \infty)[0,∞). The paper's qoq^oqo is a parameter characterized by F(qo)=(p−c)/(p−v)F(q^o) = (p - c)/(p - v)F(qo)=(p−c)/(p−v), and the first milestone proves it exists and is unique.

Profits are defined in the paper's primitive (quantity, price) forms composed with the inducing prices; the closed forms are milestones, not definitions.

Readings of informal words, each named in the item concerned:

  • "increasing" in Lemma 1 and in Eqs. (2), (5), (9) is strict, as the proofs show; "concave" in Theorem 2 is strict concavity, as the proof shows via Lemma 1.
  • "unimodal" means strictly increasing on [0,q^][0, \hat q][0,q^​] and strictly decreasing on [q^,∞)[\hat q, \infty)[q^​,∞) for some q^>0\hat q > 0q^​>0.
  • Uniqueness in Lemma 4 (i)–(ii) is over q>0q > 0q>0, since all profits vanish at 000. Theorem 3 and Lemma 4 (v) hold for every maximizer, and the maximizers' existence is stated.
  • Theorem 6's "includes all" is set equality, which its proof establishes. The survival conjunct comes from Lemma 5, which the proof's last sentence invokes.
  • "prefers to prebook zero … rather than any positive amount" is strict preference.
  • The contract space is the admissible contracts, q≥0q \ge 0q≥0 with wholesale price in [c,p][c, p][c,p] (equivalently 0≤q≤qo0 \le q \le q^o0≤q≤qo in both modes). This is an explicit addition. The paper restricts prices to w^1<p\hat w_1 < pw^1​<p and w1=w2<pw_1 = w_2 < pw1​=w2​<p and states that contracts with q>qoq > q^oq>qo are Pareto inferior; but w^1<p\hat w_1 < pw^1​<p admits push with q>qoq > q^oq>qo (w^1<c\hat w_1 < cw^1​<c), where the retailer earns over Πo\Pi^oΠo and nothing dominates.
  • Eqs. (20)–(21) are stated for w2>cw_2 > cw2​>c, which is what makes (21) solvable.

The statement does not follow trivially from a degenerate encoding. The demand assumptions are satisfiable, since the exponential law meets them. qoq^oqo, qPq^PqP, q∗q^*q∗ and q^∗\hat q^*q^​∗ are shown to exist inside the statements that use them, and the Pareto set is taken over both modes and every admissible quantity, not only over the claimed interval.

Welcome contributions: basic facts about SSS, jjj and jhjhjh under the demand assumptions, reusable across the series' other two missions.

Selected references

  • G. P. Cachon, The Allocation of Inventory Risk in a Supply Chain: Push, Pull, and Advance-Purchase Discount Contracts, Management Science 50(2):222–238, 2004. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.1030.0190
  • M. A. Lariviere and E. L. Porteus, Selling to the Newsvendor: An Analysis of Price-Only Contracts, Manufacturing & Service Operations Management 3(4):293–305, 2001. https://doi.org/10.1287/msom.3.4.293.9971
15 thms3 active usersReviewed
Stochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Markov Processes: Characterization and Convergence VII: Strong approximation of independent sumsTextbook

Comparing random sums with continuous paths

A sum of independent random increments is a basic model for accumulated noise. A continuous Gaussian process offers a different description of that noise, one that can be studied at every nonnegative time. To compare their individual trajectories, both objects must live on the same probability space. The question is whether their paths can remain close over a whole finite range of observation times, with a quantitative bound on the chance of a large discrepancy. Ethier and Kurtz state such a result for independent sums in Chapter 7, Section 5, Theorem 5.1 of Markov Processes: Characterization and Convergence, printed page 356.

Probability laws and partial sums

Let μ\muμ be a probability measure on the real line. Assume that it has finite exponential moments in a neighborhood of zero: there is a0>0a_0>0a0​>0 such that

∫Reax μ(dx)<∞(∣a∣≤a0).\int_{\mathbb R} e^{ax}\,\mu(dx)<\infty\qquad (|a|\leq a_0).∫R​eaxμ(dx)<∞(∣a∣≤a0​).

This hypothesis controls both tails of the distribution. In particular, its mean mmm and variance σ2\sigma^2σ2 are finite. The distribution need not be centered, symmetric, bounded, or have positive variance. Let ξ1,ξ2,…\xi_1,\xi_2,\ldotsξ1​,ξ2​,… denote independent random variables each with distribution μ\muμ, and write Sk=ξ1+⋯+ξkS_k=\xi_1+\cdots+\xi_kSk​=ξ1​+⋯+ξk​ for their partial sums.

A Brownian motion with drift and variance rate m,σ2m,\sigma^2m,σ2 can be written as W(t)=mt+σB(t)W(t)=mt+\sigma B(t)W(t)=mt+σB(t), where BBB is standard real Brownian motion and σ\sigmaσ is the nonnegative square root of the variance. When σ=0\sigma=0σ=0, this expression gives the deterministic path mtmtmt. A coupling specifies a joint probability law for the entire sequence and the Brownian path while preserving their required individual laws. The sequence coordinates are independent of one another; independence between the sequence and the Brownian path is not part of the requirement.

The strong approximation target

Theorem 5.1 asserts that a coupling and positive constants C,K,λC,K,\lambdaC,K,λ, depending only on μ\muμ, exist such that

P ⁣{max⁡1≤k≤n∣Sk−W(k)∣>Clog⁡n+x}<Ke−λx\mathbb P\!\left\{\max_{1\leq k\leq n}|S_k-W(k)|>C\log n+x\right\}<K e^{-\lambda x}P{1≤k≤nmax​∣Sk​−W(k)∣>Clogn+x}<Ke−λx

for every integer n≥1n\geq1n≥1 and every real x>0x>0x>0. Both inequalities displayed here are strict. One joint construction works simultaneously for every horizon nnn and every positive excess xxx; neither the coupling nor the constants are chosen anew after those parameters are specified. At n=1n=1n=1, the logarithmic term is zero, so the same assertion controls the discrepancy at the first observation time.

The mission consists of this full theorem. The rescaling and Poisson consequences discussed later in the section are outside its target. There are no separate supporting theorem milestones in the accepted grouping.

What the estimate provides

The estimate controls the largest discrepancy among all partial sums up to a specified horizon. Its deterministic threshold grows logarithmically with that horizon, and its remaining tail decreases exponentially with the excess above the threshold. This makes the theorem a quantitative comparison of trajectories on a common space. The opening of Section 5 identifies strong approximation of independent sums as its subject and introduces approximation of the Poisson process as a subsequent consequence.

The mathematical result is a known theorem stated by Ethier and Kurtz. The present formal target asks for a checked proof of that statement, including the existence of its coupling. The statement is supplied with an unproved theorem body; no proof of the strong approximation estimate is asserted here.

Why the coupling is demanding

The prescribed marginal laws do not themselves determine the joint relationship that makes the paths close. The construction must preserve independence within the entire increment sequence and the Brownian finite-dimensional laws while also satisfying a maximal estimate for every finite horizon. A comparison of the distributions at one terminal time does not supply these simultaneous path requirements. The exponential tail and the uniform choice of constants are both part of the goal.

Representation and conventions

The common carrier is a pair consisting of a real sequence indexed by natural numbers and a continuous real path indexed by nonnegative real times. A probability measure on this carrier is the unknown coupling. Its first coordinate at index zero represents ξ1\xi_1ξ1​, so summing over the first kkk natural indices represents SkS_kSk​ exactly. Its second coordinate is standard Brownian motion; the affine expression mt+σB(t)mt+\sigma B(t)mt+σB(t) supplies the general drift and variance.

The finite maximum event is expressed by the existence of an integer kkk with 1≤k≤n1\leq k\leq n1≤k≤n whose error exceeds the threshold. This avoids any convention for a maximum of an empty set. Exponential integrability supplies the finite moments needed for the mean and variance. The probability bound uses the nonnegative extended-real embedding of the positive finite quantity Ke−λxK e^{-\lambda x}Ke−λx. The formal statement retains the full exponential-moment class, including point masses. Existing probability-measure, independence, law, Brownian-motion, and variance definitions supply the mathematical vocabulary.

Selected references

Stewart N. Ethier and Thomas G. Kurtz, Markov Processes: Characterization and Convergence, Wiley, 1986 (held reprint copyright 1986/2005), Chapter 7, Section 5, Theorem 5.1 and equation (5.1), printed page 356; local source PDF page 365. The book title and authors are recorded on local PDF page 2.

18 thms3 active usersReviewed
Captain: mikedeng1

Markov Processes: Characterization and Convergence 12: Strong approximation of independent sumsTextbook

Why couple sums to Brownian motion

Independent sums are a basic model for accumulated random fluctuation. A central limit theorem describes their distribution at one large time, and a functional limit theorem describes weak convergence of a rescaled path. Strong approximation asks for substantially more: construct the sums and a Brownian motion on one probability space so that their paths remain close, with an explicit error bound that holds simultaneously over all earlier integer times. Such a coupling turns Brownian path estimates into quantitative information about random walks and independent sums.

Chapter 7, Section 5 of Stewart N. Ethier and Thomas G. Kurtz, Markov Processes: Characterization and Convergence (Wiley, 1986) states this strong approximation result as Theorem 5.1. Its estimate has logarithmic deterministic error and a strictly exponential tail. The theorem is known as a Komlós–Major–Tusnády type approximation, but the mission follows the exact formulation and hypotheses printed by Ethier and Kurtz.

Probability law and common space

Let μ\muμ be a probability measure on R\mathbb RR. The hypothesis requires an α0>0\alpha_0>0α0​>0 such that

∫Reαx μ(dx)<∞whenever ∣α∣≤α0.\int_{\mathbb R} e^{\alpha x}\,\mu(dx)<\infty \qquad\text{whenever }|\alpha|\leq \alpha_0.∫R​eαxμ(dx)<∞whenever ∣α∣≤α0​.

Thus the moment-generating integral is finite on a neighborhood of zero. No centering, symmetry, bounded-support, or positive-variance assumption is made.

The conclusion constructs one probability space carrying an iid sequence (ξi)i≥1(\xi_i)_{i\geq1}(ξi​)i≥1​ with common law μ\muμ and a Brownian motion WWW. The Brownian motion has drift and variance chosen to match one summand:

E[W(1)]=E[ξ1]=m,var⁡(W(1))=var⁡(ξ1)=σ2.E[W(1)]=E[\xi_1]=m, \qquad \operatorname{var}(W(1))=\operatorname{var}(\xi_1)=\sigma^2.E[W(1)]=E[ξ1​]=m,var(W(1))=var(ξ1​)=σ2.

Writing Sk=∑i=1kξiS_k=\sum_{i=1}^k\xi_iSk​=∑i=1k​ξi​, both SkS_kSk​ and W(k)W(k)W(k) are evaluated on this same space. The theorem does not require the iid sequence to be independent of the Brownian coordinate; their dependence is precisely what permits a close coupling.

Formalization target

There are positive constants CCC, KKK, and λ\lambdaλ, depending only on μ\muμ, such that for every integer n≥1n\geq1n≥1 and every real x>0x>0x>0,

P{max⁡1≤k≤n∣Sk−W(k)∣>Clog⁡n+x}<Ke−λx.P\left\{\max_{1\leq k\leq n}|S_k-W(k)|>C\log n+x\right\} <K e^{-\lambda x}.P{1≤k≤nmax​∣Sk​−W(k)∣>Clogn+x}<Ke−λx.

Both inequalities are strict: the discrepancy event uses >>> and its probability is <Ke−λx<K e^{-\lambda x}<Ke−λx. The constants and the entire coupling are chosen before nnn and xxx. The logarithmic term is retained at n=1n=1n=1, where log⁡1=0\log 1=0log1=0.

The Lean statement uses sequence coordinates indexed from zero, so coordinate iii represents the source variable ξi+1\xi_{i+1}ξi+1​ and Finset.range k is exactly the sum of the first kkk variables. An existential index kkk with 1≤k≤n1\leq k\leq n1≤k≤n expresses the finite maximum event without replacing either strict inequality.

What the theorem provides

Weak convergence compares distributions after rescaling and does not place a prelimit sum and its limiting process on the same sample point. This theorem instead supplies a simultaneous pathwise comparison through a common-space construction. The exponential tail quantifies the chance that the uniform error up to time nnn exceeds the logarithmic scale by an additional amount xxx.

The formal statement records the complete coupling rather than only its consequence for normalized terminal sums. It exposes the iid coordinate laws, mutual independence of those coordinates, the Brownian law, the moment-matched affine scaling, the positivity and quantifier order of the constants, and the exact maximal-error event. This is a statement-only formalization: the theorem remains an open Lean goal, and no proof claim is made.

Where the difficulty lies

Matching a single sum to a Gaussian random variable is not enough. The construction must coordinate every partial sum with one Brownian path, uniformly over all k≤nk\leq nk≤n, while keeping the error logarithmic and the excess probability exponentially small. Independent coupling at each time would destroy consistency across times, while an ordinary invariance principle gives convergence in distribution without the stated finite-nnn tail. The difficulty is therefore the joint construction with all of these quantitative requirements at once.

Formalization scope and conventions

The common carrier is the product of a real sequence space with the subtype of continuous functions from nonnegative real time to R\mathbb RR. A probability measure QQQ on that carrier is the joint law. iIndepFun asserts mutual independence of all sequence coordinates, and HasLaw gives each coordinate the law μ\muμ. IsBrownianReal specifies the standard Brownian second coordinate.

The Brownian motion appearing in the estimate is defined from that standard coordinate by

W(t)=mt+var⁡μ(X) B(t).W(t)=mt+\sqrt{\operatorname{var}_\mu(X)}\,B(t).W(t)=mt+varμ​(X)​B(t).

This representation covers the zero-variance case: then the scaled Brownian fluctuation vanishes and WWW is deterministic, while the auxiliary standard Brownian coordinate may still be present on the common carrier. The exponential-moment hypothesis supplies the intended finite first and second moments. Probabilities use extended nonnegative reals, and the finite positive real bound Ke−λxK e^{-\lambda x}Ke−λx is embedded with ENNReal.ofReal.

No local auxiliary definition is expression-essential: all objects in the theorem are provided by Mathlib. The mission intentionally excludes the section's rescaling observations and Poisson corollaries, which do not form separate capstone goals in the accepted grouping. Useful future contributions include the proof of this exact common-space theorem and reusable coupling infrastructure that preserves strict tail estimates.

Selected references

  • Stewart N. Ethier and Thomas G. Kurtz, Markov Processes: Characterization and Convergence, Wiley, 1986, Chapter 7, Section 5, Theorem 5.1, equation (5.1), printed p. 356. Wiley DOI
18 thms3 active usersReviewed
Machine LearningStatistics·Captain: mikedeng1

Support Vector Machines VI: An Oracle Inequality for Classifying with Support Vector MachinesTextbook

Motivation

A support vector machine for classification is trained by minimizing a regularized hinge-loss objective — never the classification loss itself, which is non-convex and computationally intractable to minimize. Every earlier mission in this series supplies one piece of the argument that this substitution is nonetheless justified: 01-loss-functions shows the excess hinge risk controls the excess classification risk (Zhang's inequality); 05-concentration supplies a Hilbert-space concentration inequality; and Chapter 6 of the book (not itself a mission in this series, but cited here) combines concentration with a stability argument to bound how far the empirical SVM solution's regularized hinge risk can be from its population minimum. Steinwart & Christmann, Support Vector Machines (Springer 2008, Information Science and Statistics), Chapter 8, assembles exactly these three pieces into Theorem 8.1: an explicit, finite-sample, non-asymptotic bound on how close an SVM classifier's classification risk gets to the Bayes risk — the payoff result the whole apparatus of Chapters 2, 5 and 6 was built to deliver.

Setting

Fix a measurable space XXX and Y:={−1,1}Y := \{-1,1\}Y:={−1,1}. A loss L:X×Y×R→[0,∞)L : X \times Y \times \mathbb R \to [0,\infty)L:X×Y×R→[0,∞), a distribution PPP on X×YX \times YX×Y, the LLL-risk RL,P(f):=∫L(x,y,f(x)) dP(x,y)R_{L,P}(f) := \int L(x,y,f(x)) \,dP(x,y)RL,P​(f):=∫L(x,y,f(x))dP(x,y), and the Bayes risk RL,P∗:=inf⁡fRL,P(f)R^*_{L,P} := \inf_f R_{L,P}(f)RL,P∗​:=inff​RL,P​(f) are exactly as in 01-loss-functions, restated locally here. The hinge loss is Lhinge(y,t):=max⁡{0,1−yt}L_{\mathrm{hinge}}(y,t) := \max\{0,1-yt\}Lhinge​(y,t):=max{0,1−yt} and the classification loss is Lclass(y,t):=1(−∞,0](y⋅sgn⁡t)L_{\mathrm{class}}(y,t) := \mathbf 1_{(-\infty,0]}(y\cdot\operatorname{sgn} t)Lclass​(y,t):=1(−∞,0]​(y⋅sgnt).

Let HHH be a reproducing kernel Hilbert space (RKHS) of a kernel kkk over XXX, i.e. a Hilbert space of functions X→RX \to \mathbb RX→R in which point evaluation is represented by an inner product against a feature map x↦kx∈Hx \mapsto k_x \in Hx↦kx​∈H with k(x,x′)=⟨kx,kx′⟩Hk(x,x') = \langle k_x,k_{x'}\rangle_Hk(x,x′)=⟨kx​,kx′​⟩H​. Write ∥k∥∞:=sup⁡xk(x,x)\|k\|_\infty := \sup_x \sqrt{k(x,x)}∥k∥∞​:=supx​k(x,x)​ for the kernel's sup-bound. For a sample D:=((x1,y1),…,(xn,yn))∈(X×Y)nD := ((x_1,y_1),\dots,(x_n,y_n)) \in (X\times Y)^nD:=((x1​,y1​),…,(xn​,yn​))∈(X×Y)n, the empirical risk is RL,D(f):=1n∑iL(xi,yi,f(xi))R_{L,D}(f) := \tfrac1n \sum_i L(x_i,y_i,f(x_i))RL,D​(f):=n1​∑i​L(xi​,yi​,f(xi​)), and the SVM decision function fD,λf_{D,\lambda}fD,λ​ is the minimizer over HHH of g↦λ∥g∥H2+RL,D(g)g \mapsto \lambda\|g\|_H^2 + R_{L,D}(g)g↦λ∥g∥H2​+RL,D​(g) — the regularized empirical risk minimizer a practical SVM solver computes. The restricted Bayes risk on HHH is RL,P,H∗:=inf⁡f∈HRL,P(f)R^*_{L,P,H} := \inf_{f\in H} R_{L,P}(f)RL,P,H∗​:=inff∈H​RL,P​(f), and the approximation error function is A2(λ):=inf⁡f∈Hλ∥f∥H2+RL,P(f)−RL,P,H∗A_2(\lambda) := \inf_{f\in H} \lambda\|f\|_H^2 + R_{L,P}(f) - R^*_{L,P,H}A2​(λ):=inff∈H​λ∥f∥H2​+RL,P​(f)−RL,P,H∗​: the price, in excess risk, of restricting attention to HHH at regularization strength λ\lambdaλ.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 8.1 — oracle inequality for classifying with SVMs

RLclass,P(fD,λ)−RLclass,P∗<A2(λ)+λ−1(8τn+4n+8τ3n)R_{L_{\mathrm{class}},P}(f_{D,\lambda}) - R^*_{L_{\mathrm{class}},P} < A_2(\lambda) + \lambda^{-1}\left(\sqrt{\tfrac{8\tau}{n}} + \sqrt{\tfrac{4}{n} + \tfrac{8\tau}{3n}}\right)RLclass​,P​(fD,λ​)−RLclass​,P∗​<A2​(λ)+λ−1(n8τ​​+n4​+3n8τ​​)

with PnP^nPn-probability at least 1−e−τ1-e^{-\tau}1−e−τ, for the hinge loss, HHH a separable RKHS with ∥k∥∞≤1\|k\|_\infty \le 1∥k∥∞​≤1, and PPP such that HHH is dense in L1(PX)L^1(P_X)L1(PX​). The bound is finite-sample (valid for every fixed nnn, not just asymptotically) and fully explicit: no unspecified constants beyond A2(λ)A_2(\lambda)A2​(λ) itself, which is a genuine, computable-in-principle quantity depending on HHH, PPP and λ\lambdaλ, not a placeholder. Making the right-hand side small — e.g. letting λ→0\lambda \to 0λ→0 slowly as n→∞n\to\inftyn→∞ — is exactly what proves an SVM classifier consistent for the classification risk, even though it never optimizes that risk directly.

Three milestones, each the specific instance of an earlier chapter's result that this proof invokes (attack order):

  1. Theorem 6.24 instance (hinge loss): λ∥fD,λ∥H2+RL,P(fD,λ)−RL,P,H∗<A2(λ)+λ−1(8τ/n+4/n+8τ/(3n))\lambda\|f_{D,\lambda}\|_H^2 + R_{L,P}(f_{D,\lambda}) - R^*_{L,P,H} < A_2(\lambda) + \lambda^{-1}(\sqrt{8\tau/n}+\sqrt{4/n+8\tau/(3n)})λ∥fD,λ​∥H2​+RL,P​(fD,λ​)−RL,P,H∗​<A2​(λ)+λ−1(8τ/n​+4/n+8τ/(3n)​) with PnP^nPn-probability at least 1−e−τ1-e^{-\tau}1−e−τ — the general oracle inequality for regularized SVMs (Chapter 6, not itself a mission of this series), specialized to the hinge loss, whose global Lipschitz constant 111 collapses the general theorem's Lipschitz-constant factor away.
  2. Theorem 5.31 instance: RLhinge,P,H∗=RLhinge,P∗R^*_{L_{\mathrm{hinge}},P,H} = R^*_{L_{\mathrm{hinge}},P}RLhinge​,P,H∗​=RLhinge​,P∗​ — the RKHS's restricted Bayes hinge risk equals the unrestricted one, using HHH's density in L1(PX)L^1(P_X)L1(PX​) and the fact (Lemma 2.25 v)) that the hinge loss is automatically a PPP-integrable Nemitski loss.
  3. Theorem 2.31 instance (Zhang's inequality, second clause): RLclass,P(f)−RLclass,P∗≤RLhinge,P(f)−RLhinge,P∗R_{L_{\mathrm{class}},P}(f) - R^*_{L_{\mathrm{class}},P} \le R_{L_{\mathrm{hinge}},P}(f) - R^*_{L_{\mathrm{hinge}},P}RLclass​,P​(f)−RLclass​,P∗​≤RLhinge​,P​(f)−RLhinge​,P∗​ for every measurable fff with finite hinge and classification risk — this series' own 01-loss-functions mission's zhang_inequality, second assertion, restated locally.

Chaining these three (with milestone 2 used to rewrite milestone 1's RL,P,H∗R^*_{L,P,H}RL,P,H∗​ as RL,P∗R^*_{L,P}RL,P∗​, then milestone 3 applied to f=fD,λf=f_{D,\lambda}f=fD,λ​) is exactly the book's four-line proof of Theorem 8.1.

Significance

Theorem 8.1 is this series' capstone: every other chapter's result (loss calibration, RKHS theory, representer theorem, Hilbert-space concentration, the general SVM oracle inequality) is a prerequisite this theorem consumes, and nothing later in the book depends on formalizing it further to be meaningful in its own right — it is already a complete, citable, explicit consistency-and-rate statement for SVM classification. It is also the first result in this series whose statement combines three distinct chapters' machinery into a single inequality, making the "restate the specific instance, not the general machinery" discipline (Hard Rule 9) most visibly load-bearing here: none of Theorem 6.24, Theorem 5.31 or Theorem 2.31 in their full generality is needed, only the narrow slice each contributes to this one proof.

No machine-checked formalization of an SVM classification oracle inequality of this kind is known to exist in a public Lean/Mathlib development (see prior-art search below): statistical learning theory results of this shape (finite-sample high-probability bounds combining regularization, approximation error and concentration) are largely unformalized outside isolated concentration inequalities.

Difficulty

The difficulty here is compositional rather than computational: each of the three milestones is, in its own chapter, a short consequence of substantial earlier machinery (Theorem 6.24 rests on a stability argument plus Hilbert-space Hoeffding; Theorem 5.31 rests on continuity of the risk functional on LpL^pLp; Theorem 2.31 rests on a pointwise case analysis), but none of that earlier machinery is re-derived here — only the specific numerical instance each milestone hands to Theorem 8.1's proof. Getting the three instances to compose correctly (in particular, making sure milestone 1's restrictedBayesRisk and milestone 2's equality target the identical quantity, so the substitution the book's proof performs is literally available) is the main formalization risk, not any single proof step.

The probabilistic statement itself is genuinely over the product measure PnP^nPn on samples of size nnn, not an expectation or almost-sure claim, and the bounded-kernel hypothesis ∥k∥∞≤1\|k\|_\infty\le1∥k∥∞​≤1 is load-bearing (it is what fixes the "888" and "444" constants exactly, not just up to a normalization).

Formalization scope

XXX is an arbitrary measurable space; HHH is a general real Hilbert space (NormedAddCommGroup H, InnerProductSpace ℝ H, CompleteSpace H), not specialized to a concrete function space, matching the book's own generality. IsRKHSOfKernel, risk/bayesRisk, classLoss/hingeLoss and empiricalRisk are restated locally in this mission's own Classification sub-namespace — per Hard Rule 9, a draft mission cannot import another draft's definitions, so these duplicate (with identical mathematical content) definitions already drafted in 01-loss-functions and 04-representer. IsSVMSolution encodes "fD,λf_{D,\lambda}fD,λ​ minimizes the regularized empirical risk over HHH" directly as a hypothesis rather than re-deriving existence and uniqueness (04-representer's territory). DenseInL1 renders "HHH dense in L1(PX)L^1(P_X)L1(PX​)" as an ε\varepsilonε-approximation property in the L1L^1L1 seminorm rather than via the Lp subtype, to keep the statement self-contained without importing Chapter 5's own Lp-space apparatus. ∥k∥∞≤1\|k\|_\infty \le 1∥k∥∞​≤1 is ∀ x, k x x ≤ 1 (since ∥k∥∞:=sup⁡xk(x,x)\|k\|_\infty := \sup_x\sqrt{k(x,x)}∥k∥∞​:=supx​k(x,x)​, Eq. (4.15)). "With PnP^nPn-probability at least 1−e−τ1-e^{-\tau}1−e−τ" is stated as a lower bound on (Measure.pi (fun _ : Fin n => P)).real {D | ...}, the nnn-fold product measure of the event.

Theorem 8.2 (Classification with benign kernels), the polynomially-decaying-entropy-number specialization of Theorem 8.1 stated immediately after it in the book, is deliberately out of scope for this mission: it requires entropy-number and covering-number machinery (dyadic entropy numbers ei(id:H→C(X))e_i(\mathrm{id}: H\to C(X))ei​(id:H→C(X)), Lemma 6.21's covering-number bound) that none of this mission's three milestones need, and formalizing it faithfully would roughly double the mission's scope for a result that is a refinement, not a prerequisite, of Theorem 8.1. A trivializing formalization of the goal would state the conclusion for an unconstrained fSVM : (Fin n → X × ℝ) → H with no connection to L, D or λ (making the bound a tautology about whatever function is supplied, independent of what an SVM actually computes); this is ruled out here by requiring hfSVM : ∀ D, IsSVMSolution H toFun hingeLoss lam n D (fSVM D), which pins fSVM D to be an actual minimizer of the regularized empirical hinge risk for that specific sample D.

Selected references

  • I. Steinwart & A. Christmann, Support Vector Machines, Springer, Information Science and Statistics, 2008. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-0-387-77242-4 (Chapter 8, §8.1, pp. 287-291; Chapter 6, §6.4, pp. 223-225; Chapter 5, §5.4-5.5, pp. 179, 190-191; Chapter 2, §2.3, p. 37).
  • T. Zhang, "Statistical behavior and consistency of classification methods based on convex risk minimization," Annals of Statistics 32(1), 2004, pp. 56-85. https://doi.org/10.1214/aos/1079120130
  • This series' 01-loss-functions mission (Theorem 2.31, full statement and proof) and 04-representer mission (Chapter 5's RKHS and SVM-solution machinery, in full generality).
7 thms3 active usersReviewed
Stochastic Systems·Captain: wenxinzhang

First-passage time of Brownian motion to an exponentially decaying boundaryOpen Problem

Submission hold — source-fidelity repair (2026-09-04). The public goal restricts answers to elementary expression trees and is only a stronger subquestion. It does not formalize the source's broader special-function closed-form question. The existing published target is preserved, with this scope warning. Do not confirm or submit this version as a faithful formalization of the full source. The legacy mathematical target below is retained for traceability while the replacement is prepared.

Motivation

A standard Brownian motion starts below the exponentially decaying boundary b(t)=b0 exp(-ct). The first time it crosses the boundary has a continuous density characterized by a generalized Abel--Volterra integral equation. The source asks for an explicit distribution, motivated in part by neuronal threshold models with a decaying refractory boundary.

This mission turns CUHK-Shenzhen AI Math Problem 13, First-passage time of Brownian motion to an exponentially decaying boundary, into an auditable Lean campaign. The objective is not merely to transcribe notation: it is to expose the mathematical model, the capstone, and a smaller attack surface as separate artifacts that other formalizers can inspect and reuse.

Setting

Construct one expression in a fixed elementary language whose evaluation is a continuous nonnegative density on positive times, solves the Abel equation, and integrates to one. The language contains real constants, rational constants, arithmetic, exp, log, square root, trigonometric functions, and the normal density. The first milestone drops elementary representability and normalization and asks for a continuous nonnegative Abel solution.

Significance

Solving this target would settle the precise finite or analytic core represented by the Lean statement and would create reusable infrastructure in Brownian motion, first-passage times, stochastic processes, Volterra integral equations. Even a rigorous disproof is valuable: several entries in this collection deliberately ask whether an attractive extrapolation is true, and Lean forces a counterexample to satisfy every side condition. The mission therefore treats theorem proving and model criticism as equally legitimate research outcomes.

Difficulty

Moving-boundary first-passage laws rarely have elementary closed forms. The Abel kernel is singular at the upper endpoint, and showing that a candidate equation solution is the actual passage density requires uniqueness and probability normalization. The capstone may be false under the selected expression language; a non-elementarity theorem would be a legitimate disproof of this precise formal target.

Suggested attack route

Formalize existence and uniqueness for the Volterra equation using weakly singular kernels, then connect it to Brownian first passage. Explore transformations suggested by the exponential boundary, Laplace transforms, and iterative resolvent kernels. Symbolic or numerical calculations may reveal special-function rather than elementary structure. If so, characterize the required extension of the expression language and prove why the current language is insufficient.

Formalization scope

The already-published goal uses finite elementary-expression trees with arithmetic, exp/log/sqrt, sin/cos and normal density. The source explicitly permits standard special functions beyond this language. Accordingly the published declaration is a stronger elementary-only subquestion, not a faithful replacement for the full closed-form question. It is preserved as an existing result; its proof or disproof must not be reported as settling every special-function formula. The Abel-solution milestone asserts only existence of a continuous nonnegative solution; uniqueness, normalization, and identification with the first-passage density remain separate obligations. A complete source-faithful replacement needs an agreed formula class or a concrete proposed formula, not an unrestricted function renamed a closed form.

Milestones

For each positive boundary height and decay parameter, there exists a continuous nonnegative solution of the stated Abel equation on positive times. This node asserts existence only, not uniqueness, unit mass, or an elementary closed form.

Timeline and literature status

The CUHK-Shenzhen AI Math Problems page added this problem on June 23, 2026. At the drafting date, August 31, 2026, the status and target corrections described above were checked against the source page and the cited primary material.

Acceptance criteria

A contribution may prove the displayed theorem or refute it by constructing data satisfying every Lean hypothesis while negating the conclusion. Informal changes of model do not count: any proposed correction must be submitted as a separately reviewed statement with an explanation of which source ambiguity or false implication it repairs. Definitions must remain computational or mathematically constrained; fields that simply assume the desired conclusion are not acceptable. Every proof must compile against the mission's pinned Mathlib revision, use no sorry, and expose a top-level theorem solution when submitted to Prove2Me.

The main theorem is intentionally separated from a smaller milestone. Contributors should preserve that dependency order, publish reusable lemmas rather than monolithic tactics, and report whether a lemma is analytic, algebraic, combinatorial, or infrastructure-only. Numerical evidence, external computer algebra, and exhaustive search are welcome for discovery, but a final certificate must be replayable by Lean. If an external result is invoked, its hypotheses must be represented in the formal statement or proved in the dependency tree.

Formal verification policy

The files were built locally with Lean 4.30.0 and Mathlib revision c5ea00351c28e24afc9f0f84379aa41082b1188f, the supported Prove2Me environment at drafting time. The mission definition file is ordered before all theorem files, and each theorem imports exactly that public definition module or Mathlib. Independent blind read-backs accompany the draft items so reviewers can compare what the Lean code literally says with this mathematical description. Human confirmation remains required before the public proposal can be submitted for moderation.

Selected references

  • Original CUHK-Shenzhen problem
5 thms3 active usersReviewed
Operations ResearchOptimizationStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Dimensioning Large Call Centers III: Asymptotically Optimal Staffing in the Quality-Driven RegimeResearch Paper

Motivation

How many agents should a call center staff? Telephone call centers employ millions of people, and staffing is their largest cost, so the question is asked every half hour of every day (Gans, Koole & Mandelbaum, 2003). The classical model is the M/M/N (Erlang-C) queue: calls arrive at rate λ\lambdaλ, service times are exponential with mean 1/μ1/\mu1/μ, and NNN agents serve in parallel. Practitioners use the square-root safety staffing rule N≈λ/μ+yλ/μN \approx \lambda/\mu + y\sqrt{\lambda/\mu}N≈λ/μ+yλ/μ​, which Halfin and Whitt (1981) justified in the regime where the probability of waiting stays bounded away from 000 and 111.

Borst, Mandelbaum and Reiman (CWI Report PNA-R0015, 2000; published as Operations Research 52(1), 2004) asked when such a rule is actually optimal: given a staffing cost and a waiting cost, which staffing level minimizes total cost as the arrival rate grows? They identified three regimes according to how the two costs compare. This mission formalizes their third case, the quality-driven regime, in which waiting is so expensive relative to staffing that the optimal number of agents exceeds the offered load by more than any fixed multiple of its square root.

Setting

Fix a service rate μ>0\mu > 0μ>0. For every arrival rate λ>0\lambda > 0λ>0 a waiting-cost function DλD_\lambdaDλ​ assigns cost Dλ(t)D_\lambda(t)Dλ​(t) to a wait of ttt time units; it satisfies Dλ(0)=0D_\lambda(0) = 0Dλ​(0)=0, is strictly increasing, and t↦Dλ(t)e−θtt \mapsto D_\lambda(t)e^{-\theta t}t↦Dλ​(t)e−θt is integrable on (0,∞)(0,\infty)(0,∞) for every θ>0\theta > 0θ>0. A staffing cost FFF, defined for real N>0N > 0N>0, is convex and strictly increasing.

For an integer N>λ/μN > \lambda/\muN>λ/μ the probability of waiting is the Erlang-C formula

π(N,ν)=νNN!{(1−ν/N)∑n=0N−1νnn!+νNN!}−1,ν=λ/μ,\pi(N,\nu) = \frac{\nu^N}{N!}\Bigl\{(1-\nu/N)\sum_{n=0}^{N-1}\frac{\nu^n}{n!} + \frac{\nu^N}{N!}\Bigr\}^{-1},\qquad \nu = \lambda/\mu,π(N,ν)=N!νN​{(1−ν/N)n=0∑N−1​n!νn​+N!νN​}−1,ν=λ/μ,

the expected waiting cost of a delayed customer is G(N,λ)=(Nμ−λ)∫0∞Dλ(t)e−(Nμ−λ)t dtG(N,\lambda) = (N\mu-\lambda)\int_0^\infty D_\lambda(t)e^{-(N\mu-\lambda)t}\,dtG(N,λ)=(Nμ−λ)∫0∞​Dλ​(t)e−(Nμ−λ)tdt, and the total cost per unit time is C(N,λ)=F(N)+λ π(N,λ/μ) G(N,λ)C(N,\lambda) = F(N) + \lambda\,\pi(N,\lambda/\mu)\,G(N,\lambda)C(N,λ)=F(N)+λπ(N,λ/μ)G(N,λ). An optimal staffing level Nλ∗N^*_\lambdaNλ∗​ minimizes C(⋅,λ)C(\cdot,\lambda)C(⋅,λ) over the integers N>λ/μN > \lambda/\muN>λ/μ.

Write Nλ(x)=λ/μ+xλ/μN_\lambda(x) = \lambda/\mu + x\sqrt{\lambda/\mu}Nλ​(x)=λ/μ+xλ/μ​, and for x>0x > 0x>0 put Fλ(x)=F(Nλ(x))−F(λ/μ)F_\lambda(x) = F(N_\lambda(x)) - F(\lambda/\mu)Fλ​(x)=F(Nλ​(x))−F(λ/μ), Gλ(x)=λG(Nλ(x),λ)G_\lambda(x) = \lambda G(N_\lambda(x),\lambda)Gλ​(x)=λG(Nλ​(x),λ), and πλ(x)=H(Nλ(x),λ/μ)\pi_\lambda(x) = H(N_\lambda(x),\lambda/\mu)πλ​(x)=H(Nλ​(x),λ/μ), where H(M,α)={α∫0∞e−αtt(1+t)M−1dt}−1H(M,\alpha) = \{\alpha\int_0^\infty e^{-\alpha t}t(1+t)^{M-1}dt\}^{-1}H(M,α)={α∫0∞​e−αtt(1+t)M−1dt}−1 extends the Erlang-C formula to real MMM. The normalized cost is Cλ(x)=Fλ(x)+πλ(x)Gλ(x)C_\lambda(x) = F_\lambda(x) + \pi_\lambda(x)G_\lambda(x)Cλ​(x)=Fλ​(x)+πλ​(x)Gλ​(x), and a surrogate cost is C[z;F^,π^,G^]=F^(z)+π^(z)G^(z)C[z;\hat F,\hat\pi,\hat G] = \hat F(z) + \hat\pi(z)\hat G(z)C[z;F^,π^,G^]=F^(z)+π^(z)G^(z). Rounding is measured by Sλ(x)=min⁡{C(⌊Nλ(x)⌋,λ),C(⌈Nλ(x)⌉,λ)}S_\lambda(x) = \min\{C(\lfloor N_\lambda(x)\rfloor,\lambda), C(\lceil N_\lambda(x)\rceil,\lambda)\}Sλ​(x)=min{C(⌊Nλ​(x)⌋,λ),C(⌈Nλ​(x)⌉,λ)}.

Two special functions appear. The Halfin–Whitt delay function is P(x)=1/(1+x/h(−x))P(x) = 1/(1 + x/h(-x))P(x)=1/(1+x/h(−x)) with h=ϕ/(1−Φ)h = \phi/(1-\Phi)h=ϕ/(1−Φ) the standard normal hazard rate. The Stirling-type approximation is

Qλ(x)=exp⁡{Nλ(x)[1−rλ(x)+log⁡rλ(x)]}2πNλ(x) (1−rλ(x)),rλ(x)=λ/μNλ(x).Q_\lambda(x) = \frac{\exp\{N_\lambda(x)[1 - r_\lambda(x) + \log r_\lambda(x)]\}}{\sqrt{2\pi N_\lambda(x)}\,(1-r_\lambda(x))},\qquad r_\lambda(x) = \frac{\lambda/\mu}{N_\lambda(x)}.Qλ​(x)=2πNλ​(x)​(1−rλ​(x))exp{Nλ​(x)[1−rλ​(x)+logrλ​(x)]}​,rλ​(x)=Nλ​(x)λ/μ​.

Asymptotic relations are limits of ratios as λ→∞\lambda\to\inftyλ→∞: aλ≈∞bλa_\lambda \stackrel{\infty}{\approx} b_\lambdaaλ​≈∞bλ​ means aλ/bλ→1a_\lambda/b_\lambda \to 1aλ​/bλ​→1, and aλ≪∞bλa_\lambda \stackrel{\infty}{\ll} b_\lambdaaλ​≪∞​bλ​ means aλ/bλ→0a_\lambda/b_\lambda \to 0aλ​/bλ​→0.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 7.1

Assume the regime is quality-driven, display (27): Fλ(κ)≪∞Gλ(κ)F_\lambda(\kappa) \stackrel{\infty}{\ll} G_\lambda(\kappa)Fλ​(κ)≪∞​Gλ​(κ) for every κ>0\kappa > 0κ>0. Let yλ∗y^*_\lambdayλ∗​ minimize Fλ(y)+Qλ(y)Gλ(y)F_\lambda(y) + Q_\lambda(y)G_\lambda(y)Fλ​(y)+Qλ​(y)Gλ​(y) over y>0y > 0y>0. Then

lim⁡λ→∞Sλ(yλ∗)−F(λ/μ)C(Nλ∗,λ)−F(λ/μ)=1.\lim_{\lambda\to\infty}\frac{S_\lambda(y^*_\lambda) - F(\lambda/\mu)}{C(N^*_\lambda,\lambda) - F(\lambda/\mu)} = 1.λ→∞lim​C(Nλ∗​,λ)−F(λ/μ)Sλ​(yλ∗​)−F(λ/μ)​=1.

The statement fixes no constants and no rate; it asserts only that rounding the surrogate optimum loses a vanishing fraction of the excess cost.

Milestones

In attack order: Lemma C.1 (GλG_\lambdaGλ​ strictly convex decreasing); the identity H(N,ν)=π(N,ν)H(N,\nu) = \pi(N,\nu)H(N,ν)=π(N,ν) at integer NNN (Section 3, p. 12); Lemma 3.1 and Lemma 3.2; Corollary 3.3 (the asymptotic optimality criterion); Lemma B.1 (PPP strictly convex decreasing); display (15); Lemma 4.1 (Halfin and Whitt); and the first statement of Lemma 4.2, πλ(xλ)≈∞Qλ(xλ)\pi_\lambda(x_\lambda) \stackrel{\infty}{\approx} Q_\lambda(x_\lambda)πλ​(xλ​)≈∞Qλ​(xλ​) whenever xλ→∞x_\lambda\to\inftyxλ​→∞.

Significance

Theorem 7.1 completes the paper's picture of optimal staffing. In the rationalized regime the square-root rule with the Halfin–Whitt function PPP is optimal; in the efficiency-driven regime staffing barely exceeds the load; in the quality-driven regime the staffing excess outgrows λ/μ\sqrt{\lambda/\mu}λ/μ​ and PPP must be replaced by the Stirling-type expression QλQ_\lambdaQλ​. The theorem gives a one-dimensional minimization whose solution is asymptotically optimal, which turns a discrete optimization over NNN into a smooth problem, and it marks the boundary of validity of square-root staffing.

The result is proved in the paper; it is not formalized anywhere to our knowledge. A complete development formalizes the Section 3 framework (shared with the other regimes of the same paper), the convexity of GλG_\lambdaGλ​ and of PPP, the Halfin–Whitt limit for the continuous extension πλ\pi_\lambdaπλ​, and the Stirling-type asymptotics of the Erlang-C formula. Each of these is a reusable piece of queueing theory in Lean.

Difficulty

The regime theorem itself is short once the framework is in place; the weight lies in the analytic lemmas. Lemma 4.2 requires uniform asymptotics of πλ\pi_\lambdaπλ​ at a staffing excess xλx_\lambdaxλ​ that may grow at any rate, from barely faster than a constant to faster than λ\sqrt{\lambda}λ​, where neither the central-limit picture of Halfin and Whitt nor a single Stirling expansion covers all cases. Lemma 4.1 concerns the continuous extension πλ\pi_\lambdaπλ​ at non-integer server counts, whereas Halfin and Whitt's theorem is about integer ones. The natural first idea, that the goal follows from Corollary 3.3 by plugging in Lemma 4.2, does not apply directly: Lemma 4.2 only covers staffing excesses that tend to infinity, and nothing in the definition of the true optimum xλ∗x^*_\lambdaxλ∗​ or the surrogate optimum yλ∗y^*_\lambdayλ∗​ says that they do.

Formalization scope

Lean represents λ\lambdaλ as a positive real, and λ→∞\lambda\to\inftyλ→∞ is the filter atTop on R\mathbb{R}R with μ\muμ fixed. The standing assumptions on μ\muμ and DλD_\lambdaDλ​ are the structure WaitModel; FFF is a function argument with hypotheses ConvexOn and StrictMonoOn on (0,∞)(0,\infty)(0,∞). Staffing levels NNN are natural numbers. Minimizers (Nλ∗N^*_\lambdaNλ∗​, xλ∗x^*_\lambdaxλ∗​, zλ∗z^*_\lambdazλ∗​, yλ∗y^*_\lambdayλ∗​) are function arguments with minimality hypotheses at every λ>0\lambda > 0λ>0, so every statement holds for every choice among ties. Liminf and limsup relations are stated through Filter.Frequently, avoiding boundedness side conditions.

The queue itself (Poisson arrivals, waiting-time law) is not formalized: the paper's analysis and all its theorems concern the closed-form cost C(N,λ)C(N,\lambda)C(N,λ) with the Erlang-C formula.

Conventions committed to: (i) the goal adds the hypothesis G(N,λ)→∞G(N,\lambda)\to\inftyG(N,λ)→∞ as N↓λ/μN\downarrow\lambda/\muN↓λ/μ, which the paper asserts on p. 12 to show the continuous optimum exists but which does not follow from its standing assumptions (it holds exactly when DλD_\lambdaDλ​ is unbounded); (ii) in SλS_\lambdaSλ​ the floor term is omitted when ⌊Nλ(x)⌋≤λ/μ\lfloor N_\lambda(x)\rfloor \le \lambda/\mu⌊Nλ​(x)⌋≤λ/μ, since the cost is undefined at unstable levels; (iii) the integrability of Dλ(t)e−θtD_\lambda(t)e^{-\theta t}Dλ​(t)e−θt is explicit, because a Lean integral of a non-integrable function is 000; (iv) P(0)=1P(0) = 1P(0)=1, the value of formula (11) at 000; (v) display (15) is stated for b>0b > 0b>0, since the ratio aλ/ba_\lambda/baλ​/b is undefined at b=0b = 0b=0. The instance μ=1\mu = 1μ=1, F(N)=cNF(N) = cNF(N)=cN, Dλ(t)=aλ tD_\lambda(t) = a\sqrt{\lambda}\,tDλ​(t)=aλ​t (Section 9) satisfies every hypothesis of the goal, so the goal is not vacuous; taking πλ\pi_\lambdaπλ​ or GλG_\lambdaGλ​ at Lean default values is ruled out by these explicit domain conditions.

Only the first statement of Lemma 4.2 is a milestone: the second, πλ(xλ)≈Q(xλ)\pi_\lambda(x_\lambda)\approx Q(x_\lambda)πλ​(xλ​)≈Q(xλ​) under xλ≤sup⁡λ1/6x_\lambda \stackrel{\sup}{\le} \lambda^{1/6}xλ​≤sup​λ1/6, fails as printed at xλ=λ1/6x_\lambda = \lambda^{1/6}xλ​=λ1/6. Contributions on the Erlang-C asymptotics, the normal hazard rate, and Laplace transforms of increasing functions are welcome and reusable beyond this mission.

Selected references

  • S. Borst, A. Mandelbaum, M. I. Reiman, Dimensioning Large Call Centers, CWI Report PNA-R0015, 2000 (the version formalized here; every index and page cited in this mission is the report's).
  • S. Borst, A. Mandelbaum, M. I. Reiman, Dimensioning Large Call Centers, Operations Research 52(1):17–34, 2004. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.1030.0081
  • S. Halfin, W. Whitt, Heavy-Traffic Limits for Queues with Many Exponential Servers, Operations Research 29(3):567–588, 1981. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.29.3.567
  • N. Gans, G. Koole, A. Mandelbaum, Telephone Call Centers: Tutorial, Review, and Research Prospects, Manufacturing & Service Operations Management 5(2):79–141, 2003. https://doi.org/10.1287/msom.5.2.79.16071
24 thms2 active usersReviewed
Operations ResearchOptimizationStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Dimensioning Large Call Centers II: Asymptotically Optimal Staffing in the Efficiency-Driven RegimeResearch Paper

Why staffing large call centers is a mathematical question

A call center must choose enough servers to limit waiting while paying for every server it staffs. When arrivals are heavy, small changes in the number of servers can change the probability of delay substantially. Borst, Mandelbaum, and Reiman study how to make this choice when the arrival rate grows and the costs of staffing and waiting need not grow at the same rate. Their CWI report treats several regimes within one queueing model. This mission concerns the efficiency-driven regime, where the incremental staffing cost eventually dominates the conditional waiting cost at every fixed positive square-root staffing offset. The resulting rule chooses an offset by optimizing a simpler cost that treats the probability of waiting as one.

The result is useful when the staffing-cost and waiting-cost primitives change with system scale. It says that the simplified choice still attains the optimal total cost asymptotically, even though the actual staffing decision is an integer and the simplified problem uses a real variable. The report states this as Theorem 6.1 on printed page 19, with its interpretation of asymptotic optimality supplied by Corollary 3.3 on printed page 14.

The Erlang-C cost model

Customers arrive at rate λ>0\lambda>0λ>0 and receive exponential service at rate μ>0\mu>0μ>0 per server. The service rate μ\muμ is fixed as λ\lambdaλ grows. For an integer number of servers N>λ/μN>\lambda/\muN>λ/μ, the Erlang-C delay probability π(N,λ/μ)\pi(N,\lambda/\mu)π(N,λ/μ) is the explicit finite-sum expression in Section 2 of the report. A customer who waits has an exponential waiting time with rate Nμ−λN\mu-\lambdaNμ−λ. Let Dλ(t)D_\lambda(t)Dλ​(t) be the cost of a wait of length ttt. It is strictly increasing on t≥0t\ge0t≥0, satisfies Dλ(0)=0D_\lambda(0)=0Dλ​(0)=0, and has finite exponential expectation at every positive rate. The resulting conditional waiting cost is

G(N,λ)=(Nμ−λ)∫0∞Dλ(t)e−(Nμ−λ)t dt.G(N,\lambda)=(N\mu-\lambda)\int_0^\infty D_\lambda(t)e^{-(N\mu-\lambda)t}\,dt.G(N,λ)=(Nμ−λ)∫0∞​Dλ​(t)e−(Nμ−λ)tdt.

The staffing cost F(N)F(N)F(N) is one fixed, convex, strictly increasing function of the server count. Its continuous extension is evaluated at real N>0N>0N>0. Total cost per unit of time at a stable integer level is

C(N,λ)=F(N)+λπ(N,λ/μ)G(N,λ).C(N,\lambda)=F(N)+\lambda\pi(N,\lambda/\mu)G(N,\lambda).C(N,λ)=F(N)+λπ(N,λ/μ)G(N,λ).

Write Nλ∗N^*_\lambdaNλ∗​ for any minimizing stable integer level. Ties are permitted. For a positive real offset xxx, define Nλ(x)=λ/μ+xλ/μN_\lambda(x)=\lambda/\mu+x\sqrt{\lambda/\mu}Nλ​(x)=λ/μ+xλ/μ​, Fλ(x)=F(Nλ(x))−F(λ/μ)F_\lambda(x)=F(N_\lambda(x))-F(\lambda/\mu)Fλ​(x)=F(Nλ​(x))−F(λ/μ), and Gλ(x)=λG(Nλ(x),λ)G_\lambda(x)=\lambda G(N_\lambda(x),\lambda)Gλ​(x)=λG(Nλ​(x),λ). The report extends Erlang-C continuously to πλ(x)\pi_\lambda(x)πλ​(x) and writes the incremental continuous objective as Cλ(x)=Fλ(x)+πλ(x)Gλ(x)C_\lambda(x)=F_\lambda(x)+\pi_\lambda(x)G_\lambda(x)Cλ​(x)=Fλ​(x)+πλ​(x)Gλ​(x). These definitions and the integer-extension identity are from Section 3, printed pages 11–12.

Formalization targets

The report defines the efficiency-driven regime by

for every κ>0,lim⁡λ→∞Fλ(κ)Gλ(κ)=+∞.\text{for every }\kappa>0,\qquad \lim_{\lambda\to\infty}\frac{F_\lambda(\kappa)}{G_\lambda(\kappa)}=+\infty.for every κ>0,λ→∞lim​Gλ​(κ)Fλ​(κ)​=+∞.

For each λ>0\lambda>0λ>0, choose yλ∗>0y^*_\lambda>0yλ∗​>0 to minimize Fλ(y)+Gλ(y)F_\lambda(y)+G_\lambda(y)Fλ​(y)+Gλ​(y) over y>0y>0y>0. Let Sλ(y)S_\lambda(y)Sλ​(y) be the smaller cost of the stable integer levels immediately below and above Nλ(y)N_\lambda(y)Nλ​(y); if the lower one is unstable, use the upper one. The goal, Theorem 6.1 together with Corollary 3.3, is

lim⁡λ→∞Sλ(yλ∗)−F(λ/μ)C(Nλ∗,λ)−F(λ/μ)=1.\lim_{\lambda\to\infty} \frac{S_\lambda(y^*_\lambda)-F(\lambda/\mu)} {C(N^*_\lambda,\lambda)-F(\lambda/\mu)}=1.λ→∞lim​C(Nλ∗​,λ)−F(λ/μ)Sλ​(yλ∗​)−F(λ/μ)​=1.

The milestone path includes the convexity of the conditional waiting cost (Lemma C.1), the agreement of the continuous Erlang-C extension with its integer formula, the two approximation lemmas and their corollary (Lemmas 3.1–3.2 and Corollary 3.3), the convex staffing-cost comparison of equation (13), and all three clauses of the Halfin–Whitt limit in Lemma 4.1. This ordering follows the objects each later statement uses.

What the result gives

The theorem certifies a staffing rule defined by a one-variable surrogate rather than the exact Erlang-C probability in the objective. Its guarantee concerns the incremental total cost above the unavoidable baseline F(λ/μ)F(\lambda/\mu)F(λ/μ), which is the economically relevant quantity when comparing two near-minimal stable staffing levels. The ratio tends to one, so the theorem is stronger than a claim that the two costs merely have the same growth order. The source also presents other regimes with different surrogates; their conclusions are separate targets in this series.

The paper proves the mathematical theorem. This mission asks for a Lean proof of its closed-form model and the surrounding lemmas. The complete development would make the report's approximation framework reusable for later results that combine a continuous queueing approximation, a surrogate minimizer, and integer rounding. It would also expose the exact assumptions needed to pass between real and integer staffing levels. No machine-checked proof of this report's Theorem 6.1 is claimed here.

Where the difficulty lies

The simple objective replaces the delay probability πλ(y)\pi_\lambda(y)πλ​(y) by one. That replacement is accurate near zero offset, but the minimizing offset itself changes with λ\lambdaλ. Pointwise asymptotics at a fixed positive offset do not directly control the value of an objective at its moving minimizer. The proof therefore has to relate the regime assumption to the location of the relevant minimizers before using the Halfin–Whitt limit. Integer rounding introduces another boundary issue: when Nλ(y)N_\lambda(y)Nλ​(y) is just above λ/μ\lambda/\muλ/μ, its floor need not be stable, so evaluating the ordinary Erlang-C formula there would compare the target against a meaningless cost. These difficulties are visible already in the statements of Theorem 6.1 and Lemma 3.2.

Formalization scope and conventions

Lean represents λ\lambdaλ, μ\muμ, offsets, and costs as real numbers; arrival-rate limits use the real filter at +∞+\infty+∞. Staffing counts are natural numbers. The service rate is positive and fixed. A WaitModel packages strict increase and normalization of DλD_\lambdaDλ​ on nonnegative waits together with integrability against every positive exponential rate. This integrability expresses the report's finiteness assumption for GGG and prevents a nonintegrable real integral from silently evaluating to zero. The hypotheses on FFF are convexity and strict increase on positive real staffing levels; FFF does not depend on λ\lambdaλ.

The report asserts that G(N,λ)G(N,\lambda)G(N,λ) diverges as NNN decreases to λ/μ\lambda/\muλ/μ, although the stated assumptions permit bounded increasing waiting penalties for which that assertion fails. The goal therefore includes this explicit divergence hypothesis, which also supports existence of the continuous minimizer used in the report's argument. The integer optimum and the surrogate optimum are functions constrained to be minimizers at every positive arrival rate. They cannot be arbitrary choices that make the conclusion vacuous. The continuous optimum appears only in the framework milestones; it is not a hypothesis of Theorem 6.1.

All formulas are total Lean functions. Their values at λ≤0\lambda\le0λ≤0, unstable integer counts, nonpositive offsets, or invalid parameters to the continuous Erlang-C integral have no queueing interpretation. Every theorem using them constrains its relevant inputs. The definition of SλS_\lambdaSλ​ ignores an unstable floor and uses the stable ceiling. At a positive offset and arrival rate this ceiling is above offered load. The Gaussian density, its cumulative integral, the hazard rate, and the delay function use the explicit formulas of Section 4; the value of the delay function at zero is the continuous extension needed by Lemma 4.1.

The queue's stochastic construction is outside this mission. The formal objects are the report's cost formulas and asymptotic comparisons, not a continuous-time Markov chain. Useful contributions include proofs of the special-function limit, convexity of conditional waiting cost, the integer-extension identity, and the reusable approximation lemmas. The regime condition is the full limit in equation (23); weakening it to an unrelated boundedness condition would change the theorem.

Selected references

  • Sem Borst, Avi Mandelbaum, and Martin I. Reiman, Dimensioning Large Call Centers, CWI Report PNA-R0015, 2000. Report PDF. Theorem 6.1, printed p. 19; Corollary 3.3, printed p. 14; Lemma 4.1, printed p. 15; Lemma C.1, printed p. 40.
22 thms2 active usersReviewed
Convex OptimizationMachine LearningOptimization+1·Captain: mikedeng1

Variance-based Regularization with Convex Objectives IV: Fast Rates for Approximate Robust Minimizers under a Growth ConditionResearch Paper

Motivation

In stochastic optimization and statistical learning one chooses a parameter θ\thetaθ from a set Θ⊆Rd\Theta\subseteq\mathbb R^dΘ⊆Rd to make the risk R(θ)=EP[ℓ(θ;X)]R(\theta)=\mathbb E_P[\ell(\theta;X)]R(θ)=EP​[ℓ(θ;X)] small, having seen only a sample X1,…,XnX_1,\dots,X_nX1​,…,Xn​ from PPP. Generalization bounds suggest trading empirical risk against its standard deviation, but the variance-penalized objective is non-convex even for convex losses. Duchi and Namkoong (arXiv:1610.02581v3) replace it by the robustly regularized risk, the worst-case expected loss over a χ2\chi^2χ2-divergence ball around the empirical distribution. This objective is convex whenever ℓ\ellℓ is, and it agrees with the variance-penalized objective up to a small error.

When the risk has curvature near its minimizers, empirical risk minimization attains rates faster than 1/n1/\sqrt n1/n​ (Bartlett, Bousquet and Mendelson 2005; Shapiro, Dentcheva and Ruszczyński 2009). Section 4.1 of the paper asks whether minimizers of the robust risk, which carry an extra variance-dependent penalty of order ρ/n\sqrt{\rho/n}ρ/n​, keep these fast rates. Its Theorem 5 answers yes, and does so for approximate minimizers, which is what iterative solvers return.

Setting

A loss ℓ:Rd×X→R\ell:\mathbb R^d\times\mathcal X\to\mathbb Rℓ:Rd×X→R is fixed, with ℓ(⋅;x)\ell(\cdot;x)ℓ(⋅;x) convex and LLL-Lipschitz on a convex set Θ\ThetaΘ for every xxx, and ℓ(θ;⋅)\ell(\theta;\cdot)ℓ(θ;⋅) integrable. The risk is R(θ)=EP[ℓ(θ;X)]R(\theta)=\mathbb E_P[\ell(\theta;X)]R(θ)=EP​[ℓ(θ;X)].

For a radius ρ≥0\rho\ge0ρ≥0, the χ2\chi^2χ2 ball around the empirical distribution P^n\widehat P_nPn​ is the set of weight vectors

Pn={p∈R+n:12∥np−1∥22≤ρ, ⟨1,p⟩=1},\mathcal P_n=\Big\{p\in\mathbb R^n_+:\tfrac12\|np-\mathbf 1\|_2^2\le\rho,\ \langle\mathbf 1,p\rangle=1\Big\},Pn​={p∈R+n​:21​∥np−1∥22​≤ρ, ⟨1,p⟩=1},

and the robust risk is Rn(θ,Pn)=sup⁡p∈Pn∑ipi ℓ(θ;Xi)R_n(\theta,\mathcal P_n)=\sup_{p\in\mathcal P_n}\sum_i p_i\,\ell(\theta;X_i)Rn​(θ,Pn​)=supp∈Pn​​∑i​pi​ℓ(θ;Xi​).

For ϵ≥0\epsilon\ge0ϵ≥0 the ϵ\epsilonϵ-suboptimal sets of the risk and of the robust risk are

S⋆ϵ={θ∈Θ:R(θ)≤inf⁡ΘR+ϵ},S^⋆ϵ={θ∈Θ:Rn(θ,Pn)≤inf⁡ΘRn(⋅,Pn)+ϵ},S_\star^\epsilon=\{\theta\in\Theta:R(\theta)\le\inf_\Theta R+\epsilon\},\qquad\widehat S_\star^\epsilon=\{\theta\in\Theta:R_n(\theta,\mathcal P_n)\le\inf_\Theta R_n(\cdot,\mathcal P_n)+\epsilon\},S⋆ϵ​={θ∈Θ:R(θ)≤Θinf​R+ϵ},S⋆ϵ​={θ∈Θ:Rn​(θ,Pn​)≤Θinf​Rn​(⋅,Pn​)+ϵ},

with S⋆=S⋆0S_\star=S_\star^0S⋆​=S⋆0​ the solution set and πS⋆\pi_{S_\star}πS⋆​​ the Euclidean projection onto it. The risk satisfies a growth condition of order γ>1\gamma>1γ>1 if, for some λ>0\lambda>0λ>0 and r>0r>0r>0,

R(θ)−inf⁡ΘR ≥ λ dist(θ,S⋆)γwhenever dist(θ,S⋆)≤r.(26)R(\theta)-\inf_\Theta R\ \ge\ \lambda\,\mathrm{dist}(\theta,S_\star)^\gamma\quad\text{whenever }\mathrm{dist}(\theta,S_\star)\le r.\tag{26}R(θ)−Θinf​R ≥ λdist(θ,S⋆​)γwhenever dist(θ,S⋆​)≤r.(26)

The complexity of the problem enters through the localized class {x↦ℓ(θ;x)−ℓ(πS⋆(θ);x):θ∈A}\{x\mapsto\ell(\theta;x)-\ell(\pi_{S_\star}(\theta);x):\theta\in A\}{x↦ℓ(θ;x)−ℓ(πS⋆​​(θ);x):θ∈A} and its empirical Rademacher complexity Rn(A)=Eε[sup⁡θ∈A1n∑iεi(ℓ(θ;Xi)−ℓ(πS⋆(θ);Xi))]\mathfrak R_n(A)=\mathbb E_\varepsilon\big[\sup_{\theta\in A}\frac1n\sum_i\varepsilon_i(\ell(\theta;X_i)-\ell(\pi_{S_\star}(\theta);X_i))\big]Rn​(A)=Eε​[supθ∈A​n1​∑i​εi​(ℓ(θ;Xi​)−ℓ(πS⋆​​(θ);Xi​))], with independent uniform signs εi∈{±1}\varepsilon_i\in\{\pm1\}εi​∈{±1}.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 5 (p. 19)

For t>0t>0t>0, ρ≥0\rho\ge0ρ≥0, and 0<ϵ≤12λrγ0<\epsilon\le\frac12\lambda r^\gamma0<ϵ≤21​λrγ satisfying

ϵ≥(28γLγλ)1γ−1(ρn)γ2(γ−1)andϵ2≥2 E[Rn(S⋆2ϵ)]+L(2ϵλ)1γ2tn,(27)\epsilon\ge\Big(2\frac{8^\gamma L^\gamma}{\lambda}\Big)^{\frac1{\gamma-1}}\Big(\frac\rho n\Big)^{\frac\gamma{2(\gamma-1)}}\quad\text{and}\quad\frac\epsilon2\ge2\,\mathbb E[\mathfrak R_n(S_\star^{2\epsilon})]+L\Big(\frac{2\epsilon}\lambda\Big)^{\frac1\gamma}\sqrt{\frac{2t}n},\tag{27}ϵ≥(2λ8γLγ​)γ−11​(nρ​)2(γ−1)γ​and2ϵ​≥2E[Rn​(S⋆2ϵ​)]+L(λ2ϵ​)γ1​n2t​​,(27) P(S^⋆ϵ⊂S⋆2ϵ) ≥ 1−e−t.\mathbb P\big(\widehat S_\star^\epsilon\subset S_\star^{2\epsilon}\big)\ \ge\ 1-e^{-t}.P(S⋆ϵ​⊂S⋆2ϵ​) ≥ 1−e−t.

Milestones, in attack order

  1. Localization (p. 44). Under (26), S⋆2ϵS_\star^{2\epsilon}S⋆2ϵ​ lies in {θ∈Θ:dist(θ,S⋆)≤(2ϵ/λ)1/γ}\{\theta\in\Theta:\mathrm{dist}(\theta,S_\star)\le(2\epsilon/\lambda)^{1/\gamma}\}{θ∈Θ:dist(θ,S⋆​)≤(2ϵ/λ)1/γ}.
  2. Theorem 1, upper half of (10) (p. 7). sup⁡p∈Pn⟨p,z⟩−zˉ≤2ρsn2/n\sup_{p\in\mathcal P_n}\langle p,z\rangle-\bar z\le\sqrt{2\rho s_n^2/n}supp∈Pn​​⟨p,z⟩−zˉ≤2ρsn2​/n​ for every z∈Rnz\in\mathbb R^nz∈Rn.
  3. Claim E.1 (p. 44). If S^⋆ϵ⊄S⋆2ϵ\widehat S_\star^\epsilon\not\subset S_\star^{2\epsilon}S⋆ϵ​⊂S⋆2ϵ​, the localized deviation Δn\Delta_nΔn​ plus a variance term reaches ϵ\epsilonϵ somewhere on S⋆2ϵS_\star^{2\epsilon}S⋆2ϵ​.
  4. Display (43) (p. 45). P(S^⋆ϵ⊄S⋆2ϵ)≤P(sup⁡S⋆2ϵΔn≥ϵ/2)\mathbb P(\widehat S_\star^\epsilon\not\subset S_\star^{2\epsilon})\le\mathbb P(\sup_{S_\star^{2\epsilon}}\Delta_n\ge\epsilon/2)P(S⋆ϵ​⊂S⋆2ϵ​)≤P(supS⋆2ϵ​​Δn​≥ϵ/2).
  5. Concentration (p. 45). P(sup⁡S⋆2ϵΔn≥2E[Rn(S⋆2ϵ)]+u)≤exp⁡(−nu22L2(λ2ϵ)2/γ)\mathbb P(\sup_{S_\star^{2\epsilon}}\Delta_n\ge2\mathbb E[\mathfrak R_n(S_\star^{2\epsilon})]+u)\le\exp(-\frac{nu^2}{2L^2}(\frac\lambda{2\epsilon})^{2/\gamma})P(supS⋆2ϵ​​Δn​≥2E[Rn​(S⋆2ϵ​)]+u)≤exp(−2L2nu2​(2ϵλ​)2/γ).

Significance

The theorem says that the variance penalty implicit in the robust objective does not cost the fast rates available under curvature. The ρ\rhoρ-dependent condition in (27) is of order (ρ/n)γ/(2(γ−1))(\rho/n)^{\gamma/(2(\gamma-1))}(ρ/n)γ/(2(γ−1)), which for quadratic growth (γ=2\gamma=2γ=2) is ρ/n\rho/nρ/n, the same order as the localized complexity term in typical parametric problems. Corollary 4.1 of the paper derives explicit rates of order dnlog⁡nd+tn+ρn\frac dn\log\frac nd+\frac tn+\frac\rho nnd​logdn​+nt​+nρ​ from it for a unique minimizer. The result applies to ϵ\epsilonϵ-approximate minimizers, so it covers the output of the stochastic-gradient methods used to solve the robust problem.

The result is proved in the paper (Appendix E). None of it is formalized: no statement about growth conditions, localized deviations of a robust objective, or fast rates for robust minimizers is on Prove2Me. A formal proof would check the printed constants, settle the boundary case ϵ=0\epsilon=0ϵ=0 (see below), and produce a localization lemma and a reduction from approximate robust minimizers to empirical processes that apply to other estimators.

Difficulty

The obvious argument fails at two points. First, a uniform deviation bound over all of Θ\ThetaΘ gives only the 1/n1/\sqrt n1/n​ rate: the speed-up comes from localizing to S⋆2ϵS_\star^{2\epsilon}S⋆2ϵ​, which requires transferring the growth condition, assumed only within distance rrr of S⋆S_\starS⋆​, to every 2ϵ2\epsilon2ϵ-suboptimal point by convexity. Second, the robust risk is not an empirical average, so standard comparisons between empirical and population minimizers do not apply. Claim E.1 handles this by moving along the segment from a bad approximate minimizer to its projection, which needs the projection to be preserved along that segment (a normal-cone property of πS⋆\pi_{S_\star}πS⋆​​) and the risk to be continuous there. The robust–empirical gap is then controlled by the variance expansion of Theorem 1. The concentration step needs a bounded-differences inequality for a supremum over an uncountable class, together with symmetrization; neither is in Mathlib in this form.

Formalization scope

Parameters live in EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin d), so norms, distances and projections are Euclidean. The sample is the coordinate process of the product measure P⊗nP^{\otimes n}P⊗n on Fin n → X, n≥1n\ge1n≥1, and probabilities are measures of sample sets (the outer measure for a set that is not measurable). The χ2\chi^2χ2 ball is the weight-vector form (8). The suboptimal sets are written without infima (R(θ)≤R(θ′)+ϵR(\theta)\le R(\theta')+\epsilonR(θ)≤R(θ′)+ϵ for all θ′∈Θ\theta'\in\Thetaθ′∈Θ). Each supremum "sup⁡≥c\sup\ge csup≥c" is written as "for every δ>0\delta>0δ>0 some θ\thetaθ reaches c−δc-\deltac−δ", so no statement relies on the default value of a real supremum. The Rademacher complexity is the published UnderstandingML.rademacher, and its expectation over the sample is assumed integrable, so that it is the true expectation and not the default value 000 of a Bochner integral. Lipschitz continuity is required on Θ\ThetaΘ, as printed.

Corrections and presuppositions:

  • ϵ>0\epsilon>0ϵ>0. The paper prints 0≤ϵ0\le\epsilon0≤ϵ. At ϵ=0\epsilon=0ϵ=0, ρ=0\rho=0ρ=0, both conditions of (27) hold, yet for ℓ(θ;x)=12(θ−x)2\ell(\theta;x)=\frac12(\theta-x)^2ℓ(θ;x)=21​(θ−x)2 on Θ=[−1,1]\Theta=[-1,1]Θ=[−1,1] with XXX uniform on [−12,12][-\frac12,\frac12][−21​,21​] the robust minimizer is the sample mean, which is almost surely not in S⋆={0}S_\star=\{0\}S⋆​={0}. The proof divides by ϵ\epsilonϵ (p. 45). The goal is stated for ϵ>0\epsilon>0ϵ>0.
  • S⋆S_\starS⋆​ nonempty and closed are assumed. The projection πS⋆\pi_{S_\star}πS⋆​​ presupposes them, and Appendix E calls S⋆S_\starS⋆​ closed.
  • Only the upper half of Theorem 1's (10) is stated; it needs no boundedness of the values.

The constant (2⋅8γLγ/λ)1/(γ−1)\big(2\cdot8^\gamma L^\gamma/\lambda\big)^{1/(\gamma-1)}(2⋅8γLγ/λ)1/(γ−1) is the printed one; the proof uses a smaller one, which the printed condition implies. The hypotheses ϵ>0\epsilon>0ϵ>0, γ>1\gamma>1γ>1 and λ>0\lambda>0λ>0 make every power well defined. A formalization that assumed (26) vacuously, took ϵ=0\epsilon=0ϵ=0, or let the Rademacher term be a non-integrable Bochner integral would trivialize the goal; the statements rule these out.

Infrastructure: Euclidean projection onto closed convex sets and its normal-cone characterization (partly in Mathlib), convexity of integral functionals, McDiarmid's bounded-differences inequality, and symmetrization for suprema of empirical processes. The concentration tools and the localization lemma can be reused beyond this mission. Contributions toward McDiarmid's inequality and symmetrization are especially welcome.

Selected references

  • J. C. Duchi and H. Namkoong, Variance-based regularization with convex objectives, arXiv:1610.02581v3, 2017. https://arxiv.org/abs/1610.02581
  • P. L. Bartlett, O. Bousquet and S. Mendelson, Local Rademacher complexities, Annals of Statistics 33(4), 2005. https://doi.org/10.1214/009053605000000282
  • S. Boucheron, G. Lugosi and P. Massart, Concentration Inequalities: A Nonasymptotic Theory of Independence, Oxford University Press, 2013. https://doi.org/10.1093/acprof:oso/9780199535255.001.0001
  • A. Shapiro, D. Dentcheva and A. Ruszczyński, Lectures on Stochastic Programming: Modeling and Theory, SIAM, 2009. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9780898718751
  • A. Maurer and M. Pontil, Empirical Bernstein bounds and sample variance penalization, COLT, 2009. https://arxiv.org/abs/0907.3740
12 thms2 active usersReviewed
Dynamical SystemsOperations ResearchStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Dynamics of Stochastic Approximation Algorithms 4: Subgaussian Martingale Noise with Σ exp(−c/γ_n) < ∞ for Every c > 0 Satisfies Assumption A1 Almost SurelyResearch Paper

Motivation

A stochastic approximation algorithm is a recursion

xn+1−xn=γn+1(F(xn)+Un+1)x_{n+1}-x_n=\gamma_{n+1}\big(F(x_n)+U_{n+1}\big)xn+1​−xn​=γn+1​(F(xn​)+Un+1​)

in Rd\mathbb R^dRd, where FFF is a vector field, γn\gamma_nγn​ are small step sizes and Un+1U_{n+1}Un+1​ is noise. Such recursions go back to Robbins and Monro's root-finding scheme (Robbins–Monro 1951) and underlie stochastic gradient descent, temporal-difference learning, adaptive control and learning in games. The ODE method studies them by comparing the iterates with the trajectories of x˙=F(x)\dot x=F(x)x˙=F(x).

Benaïm's lecture notes (Benaïm 1999) organize the ODE method in two steps. A deterministic step, Proposition 4.1, shows that whenever the noise satisfies a condition called A1 (together with a boundedness condition on the iterates), the interpolated process is an asymptotic pseudotrajectory of the flow of FFF. A probabilistic step then verifies A1 for concrete noise models. Proposition 4.2 does this for martingale difference noise with bounded qqq-th moments, at the price of step sizes with ∑nγn1+q/2<∞\sum_n\gamma_n^{1+q/2}<\infty∑n​γn1+q/2​<∞. This mission formalizes the second verification, Proposition 4.4: when the noise is subgaussian, A1 holds almost surely under the much weaker requirement that ∑ne−c/γn<∞\sum_ne^{-c/\gamma_n}<\infty∑n​e−c/γn​<∞ for every c>0c>0c>0, which allows step sizes decaying only slightly faster than 1/log⁡n1/\log n1/logn. The notes attribute the result to Duflo (1997), see also Kushner and Yin (1997) and Benaïm and Hirsch (1996).

Setting

Let {γn}n≥1\{\gamma_n\}_{n\ge1}{γn​}n≥1​ be a deterministic sequence with γn≥0\gamma_n\ge0γn​≥0, ∑nγn=∞\sum_n\gamma_n=\infty∑n​γn​=∞ and γn→0\gamma_n\to0γn​→0 (a step sequence). Put τ0=0\tau_0=0τ0​=0, τn=∑i=1nγi\tau_n=\sum_{i=1}^n\gamma_iτn​=∑i=1n​γi​, and let

m(t)=sup⁡{k≥0: t≥τk}m(t)=\sup\{k\ge0:\ t\ge\tau_k\}m(t)=sup{k≥0: t≥τk​}

be the index of the step that contains time t≥0t\ge0t≥0. For a sequence {Un}n≥1\{U_n\}_{n\ge1}{Un​}n≥1​ define the piecewise constant processes Uˉ(t)=Um(t)+1\bar U(t)=U_{m(t)+1}Uˉ(t)=Um(t)+1​ and γˉ(t)=γm(t)+1\bar\gamma(t)=\gamma_{m(t)+1}γˉ​(t)=γm(t)+1​, so that step n+1n+1n+1 occupies the time interval [τn,τn+1)[\tau_n,\tau_{n+1})[τn​,τn+1​) of length γn+1\gamma_{n+1}γn+1​.

Assumption A1 asks that for every T>0T>0T>0

lim⁡n→∞sup⁡{∥∑i=nk−1γi+1Ui+1∥: k=n+1,…,m(τn+T)}=0,\lim_{n\to\infty}\sup\Big\{\Big\|\sum_{i=n}^{k-1}\gamma_{i+1}U_{i+1}\Big\|:\ k=n+1,\dots,m(\tau_n+T)\Big\}=0,n→∞lim​sup{​i=n∑k−1​γi+1​Ui+1​​: k=n+1,…,m(τn​+T)}=0,

or, in the form the notes call equivalent, lim⁡t→∞Δ(t,T)=0\lim_{t\to\infty}\Delta(t,T)=0limt→∞​Δ(t,T)=0 for every T>0T>0T>0, where

Δ(t,T)=sup⁡0≤h≤T∥∫tt+hUˉ(s) ds∥.\Delta(t,T)=\sup_{0\le h\le T}\Big\|\int_t^{t+h}\bar U(s)\,ds\Big\|.Δ(t,T)=0≤h≤Tsup​​∫tt+h​Uˉ(s)ds​.

Let (Ω,F,P)(\Omega,\mathcal F,P)(Ω,F,P) be a probability space with a nondecreasing sequence {Fn}\{\mathcal F_n\}{Fn​} of sub-σ\sigmaσ-algebras, and F:Rd→RdF:\mathbb R^d\to\mathbb R^dF:Rd→Rd continuous. A sequence {xn}\{x_n\}{xn​} given by the recursion above is a Robbins–Monro algorithm if γ\gammaγ is deterministic, UnU_nUn​ is Fn\mathcal F_nFn​-measurable, and E(Un+1∣Fn)=0E(U_{n+1}\mid\mathcal F_n)=0E(Un+1​∣Fn​)=0. The noise is subgaussian if there is a number Γ>0\Gamma>0Γ>0 such that for all nnn and all θ∈Rd\theta\in\mathbb R^dθ∈Rd

E(exp⁡⟨θ,Un+1⟩ ∣ Fn)≤exp⁡(Γ2∥θ∥2).E\big(\exp\langle\theta,U_{n+1}\rangle\,\big|\,\mathcal F_n\big)\le\exp\Big(\frac\Gamma2\|\theta\|^2\Big).E(exp⟨θ,Un+1​⟩​Fn​)≤exp(2Γ​∥θ∥2).

Bounded noise, ∥Un∥≤Γ\|U_n\|\le\sqrt\Gamma∥Un​∥≤Γ​, is an example.

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 4.4

For a Robbins–Monro algorithm with subgaussian noise and a deterministic step sequence such that

∑ne−c/γn<∞for each c>0,\sum_ne^{-c/\gamma_n}<\infty\qquad\text{for each }c>0,n∑​e−c/γn​<∞for each c>0,

with probability one the realised noise sequence satisfies A1, in both of its forms, simultaneously for all T>0T>0T>0.

Milestones

  1. The exponential supermartingale. For every θ∈Rd\theta\in\mathbb R^dθ∈Rd,
Zn(θ)=exp⁡[∑i=1n⟨θ,γiUi⟩−Γ2∑i=1nγi2∥θ∥2]Z_n(\theta)=\exp\Big[\sum_{i=1}^n\langle\theta,\gamma_iU_i\rangle-\frac\Gamma2\sum_{i=1}^n\gamma_i^2\|\theta\|^2\Big]Zn​(θ)=exp[i=1∑n​⟨θ,γi​Ui​⟩−2Γ​i=1∑n​γi2​∥θ∥2]

is a supermartingale. 2. Directional maximal tail bound. For every unit vector eee, α>0\alpha>0α>0, nnn and T>0T>0T>0,

P(sup⁡n<k≤m(τn+T)⟨e,∑i=nk−1γi+1Ui+1⟩≥α)≤exp⁡(−α22Γ∑i=nm(τn+T)−1γi+12).P\Big(\sup_{n<k\le m(\tau_n+T)}\Big\langle e,\sum_{i=n}^{k-1}\gamma_{i+1}U_{i+1}\Big\rangle\ge\alpha\Big)\le\exp\Big(\frac{-\alpha^2}{2\Gamma\sum_{i=n}^{m(\tau_n+T)-1}\gamma_{i+1}^2}\Big).P(n<k≤m(τn​+T)sup​⟨e,i=n∑k−1​γi+1​Ui+1​⟩≥α)≤exp(2Γ∑i=nm(τn​+T)−1​γi+12​−α2​).
  1. Eq. (18). There are C,C′>0C,C'>0C,C′>0 depending only on ddd and Γ\GammaΓ with
P(Δ(t,T)≥α)≤Cexp⁡(−α2C′∫tt+Tγˉ(s) ds)(t≥0, T>0, α>0).P(\Delta(t,T)\ge\alpha)\le C\exp\Big(\frac{-\alpha^2}{C'\int_t^{t+T}\bar\gamma(s)\,ds}\Big)\qquad(t\ge0,\ T>0,\ \alpha>0).P(Δ(t,T)≥α)≤Cexp(C′∫tt+T​γˉ​(s)ds−α2​)(t≥0, T>0, α>0).
  1. Block comparison. Δ(t,T)≤2Δ(kT,T)+Δ((k+1)T,T)\Delta(t,T)\le2\Delta(kT,T)+\Delta((k+1)T,T)Δ(t,T)≤2Δ(kT,T)+Δ((k+1)T,T) for kT≤t<(k+1)TkT\le t<(k+1)TkT≤t<(k+1)T.

Significance

Proposition 4.4 is the sufficient condition for the ODE method when the noise has Gaussian-type tails. Its step-size condition holds whenever γnlog⁡n→0\gamma_n\log n\to0γn​logn→0, so it admits steps that decrease far more slowly than the ∑γn2<∞\sum\gamma_n^2<\infty∑γn2​<∞ of the classical L2L^2L2 theory; slowly decreasing steps are what practitioners use to keep algorithms responsive. Combined with Proposition 4.1 it shows that the interpolated process of such an algorithm, with bounded iterates, is almost surely an asymptotic pseudotrajectory of the flow of FFF, and the limit set theorems of the notes then locate the limit points of the algorithm.

The result is proved in the notes and in the cited literature; it has not, to our knowledge, been machine-checked. A formal proof would add reusable pieces: an exponential supermartingale and maximal inequality for vector-valued martingale differences with a conditional subgaussian bound (Mathlib's conditional subgaussian notion is scalar), a Borel–Cantelli argument along the grid kTkTkT, and the continuous-time bookkeeping of Uˉ\bar UUˉ, γˉ\bar\gammaγˉ​ and Δ\DeltaΔ shared with the other missions of this series.

Difficulty

The moment method of Proposition 4.2 does not reach this regime: any fixed polynomial moment of the window sums decays only polynomially in the window's step sizes, and under ∑e−c/γn<∞\sum e^{-c/\gamma_n}<\infty∑e−c/γn​<∞ alone polynomial bounds are not summable over windows. Exponential tail bounds are needed, and they must be maximal (uniform over the window) and must hold for the norm of a vector, not only for a scalar. The continuous-time deviation Δ(t,T)\Delta(t,T)Δ(t,T) involves partial steps at both ends of [t,t+h][t,t+h][t,t+h], so the bound must be stated in terms of ∫tt+Tγˉ\int_t^{t+T}\bar\gamma∫tt+T​γˉ​ rather than a sum over whole steps, with constants that do not depend on ttt, TTT or α\alphaα. Finally, A1 quantifies over all T>0T>0T>0: the almost-sure statement must hold on a single event of full probability for every TTT.

Formalization scope

The space is Rd\mathbb R^dRd as EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin d) (the paper writes Rm\mathbb R^mRm); time is real. The sequences γ\gammaγ and UUU are indexed by N\mathbb NN, and their values at 000 are unused, as the paper indexes them from 111. The filtration is a Mathlib Filtration ℕ; Un+1U_{n+1}Un+1​ is Fn+1\mathcal F_{n+1}Fn+1​-strongly measurable and integrable, and E(Un+1∣Fn)=0E(U_{n+1}\mid\mathcal F_n)=0E(Un+1​∣Fn​)=0 almost surely. The subgaussian condition requires exp⁡⟨θ,Un+1⟩\exp\langle\theta,U_{n+1}\rangleexp⟨θ,Un+1​⟩ to be integrable for every θ\thetaθ and nnn. The summand e−c/γne^{-c/\gamma_n}e−c/γn​ is taken to be 000 when γn=0\gamma_n=0γn​=0, its limiting value. The suprema in A1 and Δ\DeltaΔ are taken in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞]; the supremum over an empty range of kkk is 000. In Eq. (18) the constants are chosen before the probability space, the algorithm and t,T,αt,T,\alphat,T,α.

The following readings are excluded and are not acceptable formalizations: a subgaussian condition that holds vacuously because the exponential is not integrable (Lean's conditional expectation of a non-integrable function is 000); a summability condition made trivial or false by the convention c/0=0c/0=0c/0=0; and the conclusion "for each TTT, A1 holds almost surely" in place of "almost surely, A1 holds for all TTT". The second sentence of Proposition 4.4 (the asymptotic pseudotrajectory conclusion) is outside this mission.

All hypotheses are satisfiable: U=0U=0U=0, x=0x=0x=0, F=0F=0F=0, Γ=1\Gamma=1Γ=1 and γn=1/n\gamma_n=1/nγn​=1/n satisfy every one of them.

Contributions welcome: a maximal inequality for nonnegative supermartingales in the form needed here, vector subgaussian tail bounds for martingale transforms with deterministic weights (reusable well beyond this mission), lemmas on the step processes and Δ\DeltaΔ (measurability, local integrability, additivity), and the proofs of the milestones.

Selected references

  • M. Benaïm, Dynamics of Stochastic Approximation Algorithms, Séminaire de Probabilités XXXIII, Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1709, Springer, 1999, pp. 1–68. https://doi.org/10.1007/BFb0096509
  • M. Duflo, Random Iterative Models, Applications of Mathematics 34, Springer, 1997.
  • H. J. Kushner and G. G. Yin, Stochastic Approximation Algorithms and Applications, Springer, 1997.
  • M. Benaïm and M. W. Hirsch, Asymptotic pseudotrajectories and chain recurrent flows, with applications, Journal of Dynamics and Differential Equations 8 (1996), 141–176. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02218617
  • H. Robbins and S. Monro, A stochastic approximation method, Annals of Mathematical Statistics 22 (1951), 400–407. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177729586
10 thms2 active usersReviewed
Operations ResearchStatistics·Captain: mikedeng1

Conditional Logit Analysis of Qualitative Choice Behavior 5: The Maximum Likelihood Estimator Exists with Probability Tending to One and Is Consistent and Asymptotically NormalResearch Paper

Motivation

The conditional logit model is the workhorse of discrete choice analysis in econometrics, transportation planning, marketing and revenue management. An individual facing a finite set of alternatives picks alternative iii with probability proportional to eziθe^{z_i\theta}ezi​θ, where ziz_izi​ is a vector of observed attributes and θ\thetaθ an unknown parameter vector. Daniel McFadden's 1974 chapter, Conditional Logit Analysis of Qualitative Choice Behavior, derived this model from a theory of random utility maximization and set out how to estimate θ\thetaθ by maximum likelihood. McFadden received the 2000 Nobel Memorial Prize in Economic Sciences for his development of theory and methods for analyzing discrete choice.

Every confidence interval and hypothesis test computed from a fitted logit model rests on the large-sample theory in §III of that chapter: the maximum likelihood estimator exists with probability tending to one, converges to the true parameter, and is approximately normal with covariance given by the inverse information matrix. This mission formalizes that theory, Lemmas 5 and 6 of the paper, as proved in its Appendix.

Setting

Observations are indexed serially, m=0,1,2,…m = 0, 1, 2, \dotsm=0,1,2,…, as in the paper's Appendix ("Let m be a serial index of trials and repetitions"). Observation mmm offers Jm≥1J_m \ge 1Jm​≥1 alternatives, and alternative iii carries a vector zim∈RKz_{im} \in \mathbb R^Kzim​∈RK of independent variables. For a parameter θ∈RK\theta \in \mathbb R^Kθ∈RK the selection probabilities are

Pim(θ)=ezimθ∑j=1Jmezjmθ,zˉm(θ)=∑iPim(θ) zim.P_{im}(\theta) = \frac{e^{z_{im}\theta}}{\sum_{j=1}^{J_m} e^{z_{jm}\theta}}, \qquad \bar z_m(\theta) = \sum_{i} P_{im}(\theta)\, z_{im}.Pim​(θ)=∑j=1Jm​​ezjm​θezim​θ​,zˉm​(θ)=i∑​Pim​(θ)zim​.

The data are generated at a true parameter θ0\theta^0θ0: the chosen alternatives Y0,Y1,…Y_0, Y_1, \dotsY0​,Y1​,… are independent random variables with Pr⁡(Ym=i)=Pim(θ0)\Pr(Y_m = i) = P_{im}(\theta^0)Pr(Ym​=i)=Pim​(θ0). The log-likelihood of the first qqq observations is Lq(θ)=∑m<qlog⁡PYmm(θ)L^q(\theta) = \sum_{m<q}\log P_{Y_m m}(\theta)Lq(θ)=∑m<q​logPYm​m​(θ). The moment matrix of observation mmm is

Ωm=∑iPim(θ0) (zim−zˉm)(zim−zˉm)′,zˉm=zˉm(θ0).\Omega_m = \sum_{i} P_{im}(\theta^0)\,(z_{im}-\bar z_m)(z_{im}-\bar z_m)', \qquad \bar z_m = \bar z_m(\theta^0).Ωm​=i∑​Pim​(θ0)(zim​−zˉm​)(zim​−zˉm​)′,zˉm​=zˉm​(θ0).

Axiom 7 asks that Jm≤J∗J_m \le J_*Jm​≤J∗​ and ∣zim∣≤M|z_{im}| \le M∣zim​∣≤M uniformly, and that 1q∑m<qΩm\frac1q\sum_{m<q}\Omega_mq1​∑m<q​Ωm​ converge to a positive definite matrix Ω\OmegaΩ. Axiom 6, for a given sample, asks that no nonzero γ\gammaγ satisfy (zjm−zYmm)γ≤0(z_{jm} - z_{Y_m m})\gamma \le 0(zjm​−zYm​m​)γ≤0 for all observed mmm and all jjj. A maximum likelihood estimator θ^q\hat\theta^qθ^q is a measurable choice of a maximizer of LqL^qLq, wherever one exists.

Formalization targets

Goal: Lemma 6

θ^q→Pr⁡θ0andq Ω1/2(θ^q−θ0)→dN(0,IK)(q→∞).\hat\theta^q \xrightarrow{\Pr} \theta^0 \quad\text{and}\quad \sqrt q\,\Omega^{1/2}(\hat\theta^q - \theta^0) \xrightarrow{d} N(0, I_K) \qquad (q \to \infty).θ^qPr​θ0andq​Ω1/2(θ^q−θ0)d​N(0,IK​)(q→∞).

Milestones

  1. Axiom 7 implies Axiom 5 (the full-rank condition) in all sufficiently large samples.
  2. Equation (42): Pim(θ)≥1/(J∗e2M∣θ∣)P_{im}(\theta) \ge 1/(J_* e^{2M|\theta|})Pim​(θ)≥1/(J∗​e2M∣θ∣).
  3. Lemma 5: Pr⁡(Axiom 6 holds and Lq attains its maximum)→1\Pr(\text{Axiom 6 holds and } L^q \text{ attains its maximum}) \to 1Pr(Axiom 6 holds and Lq attains its maximum)→1.
  4. Equation (43): the first three derivatives of log⁡Pim\log P_{im}logPim​ are bounded by 2M2M2M, 4M24M^24M2, 8M38M^38M3.
  5. Equation (46): each score ∇log⁡PYmm(θ0)\nabla\log P_{Y_m m}(\theta^0)∇logPYm​m​(θ0) has mean zero.
  6. Equation (47): each expected Hessian equals −Ωm-\Omega_m−Ωm​.
  7. Consistency of θ^q\hat\theta^qθ^q.
  8. Equation (58): q−1/2 Ω−1/2∑m<q∇log⁡PYmm(θ0)→dN(0,IK)q^{-1/2}\,\Omega^{-1/2}\sum_{m<q}\nabla\log P_{Y_m m}(\theta^0) \xrightarrow{d} N(0, I_K)q−1/2Ω−1/2∑m<q​∇logPYm​m​(θ0)d​N(0,IK​).

Significance

The result. Lemma 6 is what licenses reading θ^q\hat\theta^qθ^q as approximately N(θ0,q−1Ω−1)N(\theta^0, q^{-1}\Omega^{-1})N(θ0,q−1Ω−1), so that the diagonal of the inverse information matrix estimates the sampling variances and q(θ^q−θ0)′Ω(θ^q−θ0)q(\hat\theta^q-\theta^0)'\Omega(\hat\theta^q-\theta^0)q(θ^q−θ0)′Ω(θ^q−θ0) is asymptotically χK2\chi^2_KχK2​. Lemma 5 complements it: in finite samples the likelihood can fail to have a maximum (the observations are then "explained" by a direction γ\gammaγ of Axiom 6), and the lemma shows this failure is asymptotically negligible. The data are not identically distributed (each observation has its own alternatives), so the result is not an instance of the textbook i.i.d. maximum likelihood theorem.

Formalizing it. The results are proved in the paper, in outline. A machine-checked version adds: a complete proof of the existence part (Lemma 5), whose published argument is a sketch by induction over an infinite index set; a precise treatment of the estimator where no maximizer exists; the correction of two misprints in the published proof (the normalization 1/q1/q1/q in (58), which must be 1/q1/\sqrt q1/q​, and a constant in (51)); and a multivariate Lindeberg–Feller central limit theorem for bounded, independent, non-identically distributed vectors, which the proof invokes and which is reusable well beyond this paper. No machine-checked proof of these results is known.

Difficulty

The obvious route, "the log-likelihood is concave, so its maximizer converges", needs a maximizer to exist, and in a finite sample it may not; the estimator is defined only on an event whose probability must first be shown to tend to one. Consistency then needs a uniform law of large numbers for the gradient on a sphere around θ0\theta^0θ0, controlled by the third-derivative bound (43). Asymptotic normality needs a central limit theorem for independent but not identically distributed score vectors, with covariances Ωm\Omega_mΩm​ that converge only on average; the i.i.d. central limit theorem does not apply. Finally the random Hessian at an intermediate point must be shown to converge in probability, which ties the consistency result into the normality argument.

Formalization scope

  • Vectors live in EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin K); zθz\thetazθ is the inner product, and all norms are Euclidean (footnote 11's sum-of-absolute-values norm is equivalent and gives the same qualitative axiom); derivative bounds use operator norms.
  • The paper's NNN trials with RnR_nRn​ repetitions are the special case of the serial indexing in which consecutive observations repeat their data; the sample size ∑nRn\sum_n R_n∑n​Rn​ is qqq.
  • Axiom 7's limit (27) is taken in its serial form (48), with PPP evaluated at θ0\theta^0θ0.
  • The estimator is any measurable selection that maximizes LqL^qLq whenever LqL^qLq has a maximum, and is unconstrained otherwise. Requiring a maximizer for every sample would be unsatisfiable, since Axiom 6 fails with positive probability, and would make the goal vacuous; this convention rules that out.
  • Consistency is TendstoInMeasure. Asymptotic normality is TendstoInDistribution to a random vector whose law is stdGaussian. Ω1/2\Omega^{1/2}Ω1/2 is the positive semidefinite square root CFC.sqrt.
  • Needed infrastructure: derivatives of log-sum-exp, a law of large numbers for bounded independent vectors, and a multivariate Lindeberg–Feller theorem. Mathlib provides the one-dimensional i.i.d. central limit theorem only. Contributions of these general results as separate theorems are welcome.

Selected references

  • D. McFadden, Conditional logit analysis of qualitative choice behavior, in P. Zarembka (ed.), Frontiers in Econometrics, Academic Press, New York, 1974, pp. 105–142.
  • W. Feller, An Introduction to Probability Theory and Its Applications, Vol. II, Wiley, 1966 (Lindeberg–Feller theorem, pp. 256–258).
  • C. R. Rao, Linear Statistical Inference and Its Applications, Wiley (cited by McFadden as Rao (1968), pp. 347–351, for the asymptotic χ2\chi^2χ2 test).
10 thms2 active usersReviewed
PreviousPage 2 of 8Next

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

About Prove2Me

Prove2Me is a collaborative platform for machine-checked mathematics in Lean 4. Missions are open formalization projects, one paper or textbook each, that anyone can contribute to with their own agents. Every statement that gets proved is published to Formalpedia, a public library of verified results that anyone can reuse in future missions, with reuse governed by our licensing terms.

How Prove2Me worksResearch paper
SKILL.mdTourFAQContactTerms
© 2026 Prove2Me